Home

Dodge 2011 Ram Truck Chassis Cab User's Manual

1. 426 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 9 9 Manual Service i 41e 3 9 bide chan Y Eure ages 449 Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check 5 22 2 bxc che bens 401 Lubricant Selection aa 424 MEMO Deal syrer trpa ee see ee 4 aes 3 eae 134 Mini Irip Computer ia e more en iarasi 201 hls gs 4 Ow doe 6 Ce oo Oe TT 81 Amoma DINIE Sc 8 3 3 R4 dp Erde S SE dens 82 Electric Powered 00 eee eee 84 laico gay 44 4544445544504 coe eee 85 luf CT 134 QUI EN eo bb oes ewe oo wees eee ee SE 82 Rearview 3 e464 s PS Be RSG Ee aE eH Gb 81 WEE TONIN setae pose ose ee ee oe ee as 87 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 MOPal Tatts 42 s6s ea bt eeav T NES PIGET 380 448 Multi Function Control Lever 145 New Vehicle Break In Period 71 Occupant Restraints 2 5 2 3a me e 4un Ses 37 54 56 Occupant Restraints Sedan LL 54 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 317 OGOMCICE g2 ecenet anes care eaoe Gee eee ee 182 TD snes ee sha oe nee eee sewers aaa 182 CU hange Indicator sat Gacy vena CN ne de A 184 199 Oil Change Indicator Reset LL 184 199 oio oli Pr oe Boe ees ee 382 423 CODO 47 hag F4 99x pews at ae Id SE 422 Change Interyal Sosuedes sow drea kaiaia OR eod 382 Di o S sa xL pees en ye ees PEE PTS S 382 Disposal ra 4 on 6 d Roe ES hae hehe Ee os 384 ICY entrene eee ea eee eee eee es 384 423 Filter Disposal x45 dt eee on bee Hee RS
2. Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a SELECT personal setting in the system setup menu Press the BACK button to scroll back to a previous menu or sub menu BACK ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Check Trailer Brake Wiring MNT appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays M Tialet Olax tt the following messages e Trailer Brake Connected e Left front turn signal lamp out e Trailer Brake Disconnected e Right front turn signal lamp out e Lights On e Left rear turn signal lamp out e Keyfob Battery Low 4 e Right rear turn signal lamp out e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped e Service air filter e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion e Check Tire Pressure e Perform service e Wrong Key e ESP Off e Damaged Key K e Service Tire Pressure System e Key not programmed e Coolant Low e Key In Ignition 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Turn Signal On RKE Battery Low LOW WASHER FLUID Oil Change Due Dealer Info Park Assist On Park Assist Off Warning Object Detected Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out Service Park Assist System Park Assist System Blinded Trailer Brake with icon and voltage readout Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park Remote start aborte
3. The system uses a Key Fob with a factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle NOTE A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid Key During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipped The switch for the power sliding rear window is located A locking device in the center of the window helps to on the overhead console Press the left side of the switch prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle Squeeze the to open the glass and the right side of the switch to close lock to release the window the glass 036406975 Rear Window Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 176 B instrument Cluster Base 177 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 178 Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 179 ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC E l cese v suy vr t V ge rupe Eq E e Vg 192 D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC DIDI E Essa Keene PRISES uS 195 O D
5. NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not ra diator antifreeze When refilling the washer fluid reser voir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illuminates WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution After the engine has warmed up operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield Windshield washer solution u
6. When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 92 160 128 144 112 MPEG Audio 242205 16 96 80 64 56 48 y 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a
7. e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Iowing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Towing Assistance references e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of
8. e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and 2 pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the se
9. 3 Set the parking brake WARNING 4 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or REVERSE manual transmission On 4 Wheel drive vehicles shift the transfer case to the 4L position Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle 5 Turn OFF the ignition Conto WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 359 WARNING Continued e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic WARNING Continued Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a y Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a Jack Warning Label Ey B f B jack 1 If equipped remove the spare wheel jack and tools Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack from storage Only use the jack in the positions indicated and isr ine ds velucfedunns T 2 Using the wheel wrench loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one Continued turn wh
10. HAM TRUCK 2011 HASSIS CAB OWNER S MANUAL m O O Z O e esI e e e LL Ln LE8 INTRODUCTION 4 53 98 9 659 54 1 2 PR aC ERREUR eae ee ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 22 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B introduction INTRODUCTION B How To Use This Manual Mi Warnings And Cautions 4 W Van Conversions Campers 4 i Vehicle Identification Number 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenci
11. If Equipped 134 D Voice Command System Operation 118 O Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE RM 119 Transmitter T0 Memory oi a w 6c ees 135 Voice Training E 122 O Memory Position Recall Ls 136 _ foe uos 9t E ee ee 123 i ME d EN 137 D Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped us O Self Limiting Control 137 o Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped 124 3 Driver Easy Exit And Easy Entry Control 138 O Head Restraints llle 126 ll To Open And Close The Hood 138 2 Power Seats If Equipped V Wight eee 140 D Power Lumbar If Equipped 139 Headlights ssssssee 141 D Heated Seats If Equipped 130 2 Automatic Headlights 000 141 O Ventilated Seats If Equipped 133 D Headlight Delay 00 00 cee eee 142 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 O Parking Lights And Panel Lights 142 W Driver Adjustable Pedals If Equipped 149 U Fog Lights If Equipped ses o on 142 AAE Cr 150 ELIBISEIOI DIOS uos pm Rond RC AUR as 143 Mi Heated Steering Wheel If Equipped 151 ALGOLIN sse 972A ea bP oye os 144 MH Electronic Speed Control If Equipped ALights On Reminder sineayoes oe52k0 144 PIO ACUVdle NEL A Batlery DAVBE os bts 648 eke es 85S SSS 144 o To Set a Desired Speed 254329 o 9S 153 o Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 145
12. WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Displa 2 3 Actual Gear s 1 2 1 3 Allowed 4 5 D NOTE To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration engine braking press and hold the ERS button The transmission will shift to the lowest range possible without overspeeding the engine Gear Ranges Do not race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position On four wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a DRIVE position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 271 WARNING REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this Never eds the PARK position as a substitute for range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle NEUTRAL movement and possible injury or damage This range is for when the vehicle is standing for pro Your vehicle could move and injure you and others longed periods with the engine running The engine may
13. or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group 450 LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations
14. 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 32 000 miles 52 000 km L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the engine air cleaner filter irregular wear even if it occurs before Replace the spark plugs 24 000 miles 39 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes only Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect the front and rear axle fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 431 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Serv
15. 267 o Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override 2255445565 me eu3sza 443 O Five Speed Automatic Transmission 545RFE 5 7L Engine Only ll Four Wheel Drive Operation If Equipped o Manually Shifted Transfer Case I EquipDed 4954 3 25v b R9 O Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Tiansier Case C een es O Transfer Case Position Indicator Light 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ee oO Electronically Shifted Transfer Case H Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System 207 Four Position Switch If Equipped ii W Tire Safety Information 24 69 6484 40 e056 45 294 OShitt ng Procedure 45442444 he ERE Reed 282 D Tire Markings cee eee eee 294 lal Limited Slip Differential 284 1 Tire Identification Number TIN 298 W Driving On Slippery Surfaces 289 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 299 B Driving Through Water 285 5 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 300 5 Flowing Rising Water 56 Wi Tires General Information 304 Shallow Standing Water zi H Tire Pressure 2632 24 9 99x PR ET Cei 304 Wi Power Steering 66 eee eee eee 288 O Tire Inflation Pressures 305 O Power Steering Fluid Check 289 O Radial Ply Tires sess 309 Makine Drake nnn 4 os Ce eee Seek CERE 289 D Tire Spinning eese 309 M Drake SySteM duse hea hobs RESET MES 297 WR TET e fe ke
16. 4x4 only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary a a M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 440 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 144 000 Miles 238 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 251 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before J Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 miles 238 000 km filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only 152 000 miles 251 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary T Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 Inspect the CV joints only Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play
17. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel on single rear wheel SRW models On dual rear wheel models DRW the lug nuts are a two piece assembly with a flat face Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered 6 Using the wheel wrench finish tightening the nuts using a crisscross pattern The correct nut tightness is 135 ft Ibs 183 N m torque for single rear wheel SRW models and 145 ft lbs 197 N m for dual rear wheel models If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in an accident or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle Al ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided 362 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 7 Install wheel center cap if equipped and remove wheel blocks Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel This may result in cap damage 8 Lower the jack to its fully closed position If the jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack Stow the replaced tire jack and tools as previously described 9 Adjust the tire pressure when possible NOTE Do not oil wheel studs For
18. Red Mirrors 10 Amp Bat Ign Sw WIN M34 Red PASS 2 2 2 3 3 3 20 Amp Fr Rr Washer Yellow 15 Amp Bat NGC EATX Blue PCM 15 Amp Bat CCN Interior Blue Light SCM Sw Bank 20 Amp Fuel Pump Yellow MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse 20 Amp Htd Seat Htd Str M43 10 Amp Horn 2 Yellow Wheel Rear Htd Seat Red 20 Amp Ign R Rear Seat Steer M44 10 Amp IGN R S ORC OCM Yellow Wheel Red 10 Amp Horn 1 M45 10 Amp IGN R ORC Trail Red Red Tow BUX Sense 20 Amp IOD CCN Interior M46 20 Amp IGN R Trail Tow Yellow Mods Yellow BUX 15 Amp IOD SDARS VES Yellow Outlet 2 UGDO Vanity Lamp Yellow Outlet 3 M50 25 Amp ASD 1 2 Natural 30 Amp IOD Amp Radio M47 10 Amp IGN R H Lamp Green Red Wash HVAC Park 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION Fus Fuse e When installing the totally integrated power mod ule cover it is important to ensure the cover is IGN R S SWAY properly positioned and fully latched Failure to TCASE DTCM do so may allow water to get into the totally FAD TRLR BRAKE integrated power module and possibly result in a MOD electrical system failure IGN R S MFSW When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Blue CNN SCM TPM RR use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating View The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
19. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two COLD lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tem perature If the fluid level is correctly established at 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading 7 Check for leaks Release parking brake To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring bac
20. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A LED will illuminate when you are in Recircula tion mode Only use the Recirculation 045632843 Mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed e Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 e In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the Outside Air position e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection by pressing the A C button Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed to
21. according to the map 5 Press and release the BACK button to exit Customer Programmable Features System Setup Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK If the transmission is out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving a warning message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE is fol lowed in three seconds by VEHICLE NOT IN PARK Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System Setup displays in the EVIC 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the following choices Select Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll through the language choices Press the SELECT button to select English Spanish Espa ol French Fran ais Italian Italiano German Deutsch and Dutch Neder lands Then as you continue the information will dis play in the selected language Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system h
22. in PARK For four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 WARNING Continued e Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 2 GTW Information in Starting and Operating for the 3 GAWR proper inspection procedure 4 Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s Towing Requirements Tires GVWR and GAWR limits 5 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire e Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires
23. mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file
24. or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOP
25. replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MANTENANCE SCHEDULES 441 t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNINCG e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your pnr per hues Gas eo ee oe ee eG hee 445 O Prepare For The Appointment 445 APrepare A List 44444 fevered dran rr d 445 o Be Reasonable With Requests 445 W If You Need Assistance 445 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 446 O Chrysler Canada Inc Cus
26. the program mode was canceled before the feature could be changed If neces sary repeat the above procedure Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors if equipped of your vehicle have the Child Protection Door Lock system p 022605851 Child Protection Door Lock Location ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 To use the system open each rear door use a flat blade WARNING screwdriver or emergency key and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the Child Protection locks When Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision the system on a door is engaged that door can only be Remember that the rear doors can only be opened opened by using the outside door handle even if the from the outside when the Child Protection locks are inside door lock is in the unlocked position engaged NOTE e After setting the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle 022605852 Child Lock Control 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WINDOWS The control on the left front door panel has UP DOWN switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows There is a single opening and clo
27. 17 All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE e When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho rized dealer e f a programmed Key Fob is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the system s memory This will prevent the lost Key Fobs from starting your vehicle The remaining Keys Fobs must then be reprogrammed Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie General Information The Sentry Key system compl
28. A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 300 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 1 on the driver s side B Pillar 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N1 09268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehi
29. Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the Anti lock Brake System reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is n
30. Continued eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING Continued You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for against heat such as a blanket or cushion This HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious Press the switch once to select HIGH burns due to the increased surface temperature of Era level heating Press the switch a sec the seat ond time to select LOW level heating 030905580 Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the NOTE seat e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes Front Heated Seats e The engine must be running for the heated seats to There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver operate and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel below the climate controls 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from LOW to OFF automatically based on time and tempera ture of the seat T
31. Continued WARNING e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween Ist and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could may result explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for may lead to transmission overheating and failure longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop It can also damage the tires Do not spin the ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near wheels above 30 mph 48 km h a spinning wheel no matter what the speed EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED 6 Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle 372 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sa WARNING e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle Chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing You could TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Prop
32. However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 WARNING Continued operation with the Transmission Tem perature Warning Light illuminated could cause the 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components causing a fire that may result in personal injury For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warn ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Refer
33. L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km I Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 433 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O C O C O L L C C L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 434 MA
34. NEUTRAL until the light goes off e Loose Gascap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines e that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap icon will display in the telltale display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the RETURN button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds
35. POWER WINDSHIELD i SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SLIDING DOOR STEERING FLUID AND WASHER E SRS X ia AIRBAG A2 MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER DOOR AJAR INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF 7 a ej A BAS ELECTRONIC STABILITY UPPER AIR HEATED SEAT DOOR LOCK ADJUSTABLE ELECTRONIC PROGRAM BRAKE OUTLET LOW PEDALS SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM BRAKE m aC BRAKE SYSTEM UPPER AND LOWER HEATED SEAT WINDOW LIFT TIRE PRESSURE HILL DESCENT WARNING PARKING AIR OUTLET HIGH MONITOR CONTROL BRAKE e yi D 4 awot fe LOWER AIR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE ELECTRONIC ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTI LOCK OUTLET 4WINDOW DOWN STABILITY CONTROL DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM e y 4WD BRAKE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE n e Hi g rd qp t HAUL VOICE TRUNK DECK AIR CONDITIONING CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON Ks D u LOW LOWER ANCHORS pe LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW PUSH 2d CONVERTIBLE CONVERTIBLE HORN SEE OWNER S AIR ELECTRONIC TOP DOWN TOP UP MANUAL ISO CONDITIONER STABILITY 010533317 CONTROL OFF INTRODUCTION 5 6 INTRODUCTION M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce
36. Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem 306 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a
37. TS 361 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 330 Torque Converter C IUe 1s sumoessuwes pee sies s 279 low Hooks EMergency xau me Rae 8008 26 ce 4 371 JOVIS 66 hae tone 2 oe news oa p tare aoa e Ee 326 24 Hour Towing Assistance 102 Disabled Venice sess dace oe es os mecs e oos Des 3 2 OUO srirrire 545 S RE qur SEG dni ROS RR 330 Recreational seys teria iae 4e ROUES means 344 O PITT 330 Towne ASSIStANCe u decade ex eea Ep 102 acd 149 99 758 54 ouehen noe nee RE 285 Taler OWING 2 44 44eh0 tee r epi I amp P 3 e 326 A INDEX 49 Cooling Systemi 1198 4 ss ssiricceitpss tets 340 inis eee RE A See 329 Minimum Reguiremenis srede dod 8 02 o MINOS sos ceu eee oe eee A ea oe eae es SO 4 87 Trailer and Tongue Weight 330 eno CER 338 Trailer Towing URB cs scare 4 Ge bee eee 8 Dow 330 Tailer WEIS sace s ded ud e deh thti EAS 330 cnc 4 P M C 401 Electronically Shifted casu eicere pes 278 PHC Tr 424 ransmission Automatic 4 54 oda 4 a s ck ace oe RR E REOS 268 402 PEGI oie pebeGu engrar ole tere eae eas 424 IMOIDEeBallG 6519425442 ROC Ere der deg 49 us 402 euni 266 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless El urs 6244445 eu 45 24 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry eus esae eee hae s 20 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 Tread Wear Indicators 00048 310 Tip Odometer cession 654664066 x d ap dra 182 Tidi gnal cos song te
38. These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com ee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 451 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a
39. Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in this section of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC display until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display The blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected or by adjusting the blower control knob and setting the fan to any fixed speed Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automati cally There are six fixed blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the OFF position 045605986 Blower Control The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by adjusting the blower control knob The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the followi
40. a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued Improper towing can lead to an injury accident e Safety chains must always be used between your Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle transmission
41. an audible click For proper seatbelt usage refer Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions WARNINCG e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in an accident Inserting Latch Plate When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach the black latch and black buckle eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING e If the black latch and black buckle are not prop erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in an accident When reattaching the black latch and black buckle ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted If the webbing is twisted follow the preceding procedure to detach the black latch and T black buckle untwist the webbing and reattach pie een the black latch and black buckle 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front row outboard seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt away from your neck Press the button located on the
42. auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does no
43. be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON RUN or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn off the engine A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancies Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug against the hips as
44. button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating
45. can be linked to either memory position The memory system can accommodate up to two RKE transmitters each RKE transmitter linked to either of the two memory positions Setting Memory Positions and Linking RKE Transmitter to Memory NOTE Each time the S SET button and a numbered button 1 or 2 are pressed you erase the memory settings for that button and store new settings 1 Turn the vehicle key to the ON RUN position 2 Adjust the driver s seat recliner and both sideview mirrors to the desired positions NOTE Notall motors may be moved at one time Refer to Seats Eight Way Power Seat in this section for further information 3 Adjust the brake and accelerator pedals to the desired positions 4 Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets up to 10 AM and 10 FM stations can be set 5 Adjust the Automatic Temperature Control ATC while the ATC is in Auto mode 6 Press and release the SET button located on the driver s seat 7 Within five seconds press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 on the driver s seat The next steps must be 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M performed within 10 seconds if you desire to also use a RKE transmitter to recall memory positions 8 Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key 9 Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE transmitters 10 Repeat the above steps to set the next memory position using the other numbered memory button or
46. capability 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Never use a tire with a smaller load index or that specified for your vehicle Some combinations capacity other than what was originally equipped of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load pension dimensions and performance characteris index could result in tire overloading and failure tics resulting in changes to steering handling and You could lose control and have an accident result ing in serious injury or death Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control resulting in serious injury or death braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Continued CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 SPL SISAL TRE PRESSURE INFORMATION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Continued A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen Because of limited chain clearance between tires gers 150 lbs 68 kg each plus
47. chrome wheels do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts Hub Caps Wheel Covers If Equipped The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground CAUTION Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear center caps Damage can occur to the center cap and or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used A pulling motion not a pry off motion is recom mended to remove the caps For single rear wheel SRW models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off Insert the blade end into the pry off notch and carefully pop off the hub cap with a back and forth motion On 3500 models with dual rear wheels DRW you must first remove the hub caps The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the rear hub caps Position the hook and pull out on the ratchet firmly The hub cap should pop off The wheel skins can now be removed For the front hub cap on models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the caps off The wheel skin can now be removed ee WHATTODOI NEMERGENCIES 363 CAUTION e Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap damage to the hub cap finish may occur e The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry off notches Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off You mus
48. collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other Ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects c
49. device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please
50. dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VAN CONVERSIONS CAMPERS The Manufacturer s Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion camper manufacturers body builders Refer to the Warranty information book Section 2 1 C Such equipment includes video monitors VCRs heaters stoves refrigerators etc For warranty coverage and service on these items contact the applicable manufac turer Operating instructions for the special equipment in stalled by the conversion camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle If these instructions are missing please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to www dodgebodybuilder com This website contains di mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer s technical support For service issues contact your authorized dealer VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the Auto mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title
51. es se 310 O Dual Rear Wheel Models Only 292 Alite Of TB 12x cake ihti firii 310 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 O Replacement Tires 4 2oc454442404eeue44 311 lll Supplemental Tire Pressure Information I EQUIP PCG ou c5 93 2 54 1x do doa PORRO n 313 MN Tire Chains nanan aaaea 313 W Snow Tires eseness 315 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 315 B Dual Rear Wheels Less 316 Mi Fuel Requirements 04 317 O Reformulated Gasoline 318 G Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 318 H E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 319 E MMT In Gasoline 2 5 ERES 319 O Materials Added To Fuel 320 ETueLoystenr CaUMOne uisu 3 ro CES 320 H Carbon Monoxide Warnings SAL la Adding Fuel 322 3 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 323 aM Vehicle Loading 3 284 ss0chasaedvecenes 324 OCertification Label 244 2422 Rez 324 B Trailer Towing HG Common Towing Definitions 326 O Trailer Hitch Classification 929 O Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 330 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 330 O Towing Requirements aucem bre anda oaks 331 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Towing Tips o5 iot RS URS UMPXORE SS E d 339 W Recreational Towing MSnowplow 0 0 cee eee eee eee 340 Behind Motorhome EIC io 05044 eae nanos 344
52. exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other ignition switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine 2 Tilt the steer
53. for spe cific shifting instructions The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo nents NOTE The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights 4WD and 4LOW are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection When you select a different transfer case position the indicator lights will do the following If All Shift Conditions Are Met 1 The current position indicator light will turn OFF 2 The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift 3 When the shift is complete the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 280 STARTING AND OPERATING xe If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met 1 The indicator light for the current position will remain ON 2 The newly selected position indicator light will con tinue to flash 3 The transfer case will not shift NOTE B
54. full right position or when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry 033406970 e Courtesy Reading Lights 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M RKE transmitter if equipped These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pressing on the corresponding lens 031406003 Rear Passenger Courtesy Reading Light NOTE The courtesy reading lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have Front Courtesy Reading Lights been turned off before leaving the vehicle If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF they will extinguish after 15 minutes ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following The auxiliary 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets can provide locations power for in cab accessories designed for use with the standard cigar lighter plug The 12 Volt power outlets have a cap attached to the outlet indicating 12V DC e Inside the top storage tray together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol m e Lower left and lower right of the center stack A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery and can provide power at all times NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element
55. garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 KPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Inflation Pressure 4500 5500 with Steel Carcass Ply Tires This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewall As such they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires Adjusting tire pressure must be performed by personnel trained supervised and equipped accordingly Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Mounted to Vehicle During procedures when adding tire inflation pressure the technician or individual must utilize a remote infla tion device and ensure that all persons are clear of the trajectory area ee STARTING AND OPERATING 307 81c2c587 4500 5500 Tire Inflation 308 STARTING AND OPERATING ee When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel assembly mounted on a vehicle use a Remote Mount Automatic Inflation Kit or see your authorized dealer NOTE Never attempt to re inflate a tire and wheel assembly which has been run flat or is extremely under inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly for inspection Personnel trained
56. ground while filling Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines e that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started 324 STARTING AND OPERATING ee VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the Month Day and Hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options and cargo The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
57. have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio
58. in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used 384 MAINTAINING YOUR
59. increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them cause damage that result in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 WARNING Continued e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire
60. kits for their older products Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages one each behind the front center and right seats Crew Cab models have three anchorages one behind each of the rear seats WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to seat failure and injury to the child In a collision the seat could come loose and allow the child to crash into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers or even be thrown from the vehicle Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Follow the instruc tions below See your authorized dealer for help if necessary 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center Front Seat Regular Cab All Seats 1 Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat 2 Lift the cover if so equipped and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal 3 Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting 1 Tether Strap Hook 2 Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 Tether Anchor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence Crew Cab Rear Seats 1 Obtai
61. latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc or if the airbag deployed Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt 1 The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats The black latch plate can be detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on the inboard side of the passenger seat Insert the seat belt tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat belt tongue is pressed into the buckle Allow the retractor to take up the extra webbing and the buckles will hang vertically from the cab back exit bezel thus freeing up all the area behind the front seats Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat pull the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there is
62. mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone I
63. must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power 034607699 rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will P Outlet Fl St Bi need to be replaced ower Vute oor 5torage Bin 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE e Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment if equipped SSS S Lg 034605811 Power Outlet Rear Center Console Md z The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply Power Outlet Upper Lid power when the key is in the ON or ACC positions e Rear of the center console storage compartment All accessories connected to the outlet s should be Crew Cab removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engin
64. o Towing This Vehicle SIDE ACW xsns sobs ta ban ee ates a Behind Another Vehicle 344 0 Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability 0 00 sese B a a eee IMOdelS idee genoa 65554 ee ES RIPE IUS 345 D Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached 4 c0v cacdeneGune rrer Ert 342 D Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive gl 22 thet ET 345 POPC IIPS s qoscesour e he ee hee ee Pep 342 O General Maintenance 343 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belt The starter should not be operated for more than 15 second intervals Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Normal Starting Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the key fob to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the key fob to the OFF position wait five seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure A
65. occur WARNINCG Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury Preparations for Jump Start Positive Battery Post The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly A 060809873 NOTE The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post 368 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Se WARNINGE its 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park WENENG the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by WARNINC moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your Jump Starting Procedure skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission sonal injury or
66. of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to er inflate for your protection in a collision The N Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN p
67. of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 3 0 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow sand or mud it can often be moved by a rocking motion Move the shift lever rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap plying slight pressure to the accelerator CAUTION e Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure AI low the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize over heating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle Continued ee WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 371 CAUTION
68. phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous
69. possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the extender and store it the seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Driver and Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger if equipped as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Airbag is mounted in the center of the steering Wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Airbag is 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie mounted in the instrument panel above the glove com partment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 022605555 Advanced Front Airbag and Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver and Passenger Advanced 2 Knee Boltser Front Airbags if equipped NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air
70. property damage due to battery ex into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK plosion 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories ee WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES 369 CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end
71. supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administra tion OSHA should perform this work Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Not Mounted to Vehicle When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel assembly not mounted on a vehicle use a Remote Mount Automatic Inflation Kit and a Tire Inflation Cage or see your authorized dealer Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident resulting in serious injury or death Don t drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Radial Ply Tires Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not WARNING spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for h ly with Combining radial ply tires with other types o
72. tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit After lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc
73. the Hazard Warning e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas ee WHAT TO DOIN EMERGENCIES 357 agree peiorem The jack and jack tools are stored under the front WARNING passenger seat Lift the flap on the side of the seat for After using the jack and tools always reinstall them a
74. the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON an
75. the system Only one ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone Ss button and Voice Command amp vr button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display
76. this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rea
77. to link another RKE transmitter to memory Memory Position Recall NOTE e The vehicle must be in PARK to recall the memory positions e Not all motors may be moved at one time Refer to the Seats Eight Way Power Seat in this section for fur ther information To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 on the driver s seat or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 on the driver s seat or the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons on the driver s seat during a recall 5 1 or 2 or pressing any one of the power seat buttons pressing the adjustable pedals button or pressing either the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter when not in the ignition switch When a recall is cancelled the driver s seat and the pedals stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected NOTE Achime sound may be heard if setting memory was inhibited for any reason eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 To Disable a RKE Transmitter Linked to Memory 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the Key 2 Press and release the memory SET button located on the driver s seat 3 Within 10 seconds press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmi
78. to the transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the vehicle is to be towed faster than 30 mph 50 km h or more than 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels OFF the ground It may be towed on a flatbed or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a dolly or when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS lBl Engine Compartment 5 7L 377 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 378 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 378 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance L EOSTANIS s 4 cu Poser eee se er acted ht ee dr d 379 W Replacement Parts so3ewe Ves RR ER dened 380 W Dealer Service 0 00000 380 Bl Maintenance Procedures 381 ATOMO 1333909 9 wis eet abu era T9 3 382 O Engine Qu Pier osere rans xod oa res 384 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter Ln 384 O Mamtenauce Free Battery ies ck dar Rs 385 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 387 D Front Prop Shaft Lubrication Four Wheel Dave Models 2 v3 aeq d vu EX IMP irre US RR O Body EubticallOlt 5 oues rece arae nres 388 o Windshield Wiper Blades 389 o Adding Washer Fluid uus aere xm 389 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M O Exhaust System 390 ERCOOUSS SVC wars de
79. transmission and drive train damage the following precautions should be ob served e Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph 24 km h At higher speeds operate in 4H e Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating e Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting the transmission 344 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Two Wheel Drive Four Wheel Drive Models Ground Models See Instructions e Automatic transmission in PARK Flat Tow NOT ALLOWED Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL N e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED ndn NOT ALLOWED ALL ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Recreational Towing Two Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the drivetrain will result Recreational towing for two wheel drive models is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow this procedure 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle foll
80. turned on pressing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will not be displayed If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module ITBM the Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light will flash GAIN Adjustment Buttons Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0 5 increments The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 no trailer braking GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change Changes to towing condi tions include trailer load vehicle load road conditions and weather Adjusting GAIN NOTE This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20 25 mph 30 40 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 1 Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition functioning normally and properly adjusted See your trailer dealer if necessary 2 Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec tions according to the trailer manufacturer s instructions 3 When a trailer with electric brakes is plugged in the GAIN setting will illuminate 4 Use the GAIN adjustment buttons to increase or decrease the GAIN setting to the desire
81. upper belt guide and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 022605853 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Center Lap Belts The center seating position for the Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only To fasten the lap belt slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click To lengthen the lap belt tilt the latch plate and pull To remove slack pull the loose end of the webbing Wear the lap belt snug against the hips Sit back and erect in the seat then adjust the belt as tightly as is comfortable ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode any time a child safety e A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous seat is installed in a passenger seating position Children e A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in and under the belt in a collision the rear seat whenever possible e A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash forces to the abdomen not to the stronger hip bones In either case the risk of internal injuries is 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt greater We
82. use chemical flushes in your air conditioning Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book lo cated on the DVD for further warranty informa tion e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Front Prop Shaft Lubrication Four Wheel Drive Models Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Use MOPAR Type MS 6560 lithium based grease or equivalent Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate
83. while driving could result in loss of control which could cause an accident and serious belt which could result in serious injury or death 3 CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Continued 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Power Lumbar If Equipped Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support 030905750 Lumbar Control Switch Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time
84. 05993 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Bat Presafe 1 CM2200 J01 30 Amp Pink J02 30 Amp Bat Trailer Tow Pink Main MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse J03 bat Passenger Door J11 30 Amp Bat Sway Natural Node Pink Thatchum Rear Green Bat ABS Pump mE Doors JA2 40 Amp mM Starter Solenoid J05 30 Amp Bat ABS Valve Green Bat Rad Fan 1 2 J07 25 Amp Natural J08 30 Amp Pink J09 30 Amp Pink J10 40 Amp Green Bat Driver Door J15 60 Amp Bat IOD Main Node Yellow Bat DTCM Axle J16 40 Amp Frt HVAC Motor Locks Green Bat Plg Electric M17 25 Amp Bat Sunroof Brake Natural Skylight Bat L Bar Off Road M18 25 Amp TCM Trans Range Natural JB oA J06 30 Amp Bat H Lamp Wash Yellow SSR Pink MTV CM2200 Elec J14 40 Amp Bat Folding Seat Vac Pump Green PZEV 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 5 Amp Ign R ACC M27 15 Amp Bat CHMSL Brake Tan Sunroof Window Sw Blue Sw Illum M28 10 Amp Bat Corax TPM 25 Amp Prt Wiper Red PEM HVAC Htr Natural Pump M29 M30 M31 2 25 Amp Bat Inverter Natural 5 Amp Door Locks 15 Amp Bat Folding Mirror Natural Blue 20 Amp Bat Pwr Out 1 Yellow 20 Amp Bat Trlr Light Pre Yellow Safe 2 20 Amp Bat Trlr Tow BUX M Yellow HGM 10 Amp Bat J1962 Diag 33
85. 200 Ibs 91 kg of cargo and other suspension components it s important Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle that only chains in good condition are used Bro wil bet ound Gil the fice ol the divers door ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could TIRE CHAINS suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged Use Class U chains or other traction aids that meet SAE parts of the chain before further use Type U specifications Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mi 0 8 km Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2 NOTE Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains vehicles a Drecadoms Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave Continued ment Continued 314 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower sug gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than the speed recommended by the manufacturer These cautions apply to all chain traction devices includ ing link and cable radial ch
86. 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the engine the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat these steps Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RETURN button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 10 miles 16 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display EVIC Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset Trip Functions Press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button until one of the following Trip Functio
87. 34 rrer RESET 424 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 49 Programmable Electronic Features 205 A INDEX 45 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless BOY 3 4 5 4 2 4 resiu aoe des Radial Ply Tires Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap Radio Operation Radio Satellite Uconnect studios Rear Axle Differential Rear Window Features Rear Window Sliding Reclining Front Seats Recorder Event Data Recreational Towing Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N Reformulated Gasoline Refrigerant Reminder Seat Belt TTE ix 348 309 247 240 171 344 349 352 318 Remote Control Dia OVS sartre Pau meee Red REER 26 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 2 y Rs 20 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 245 Remote Starting Systemi v 45 44 2 4 doa ACERRSEUE ca oa 26 Replacement Keys ia e dos oe 655 bao 04 RUM B rires 17 Replacement C aba 2 ous sus eas eae cease es 380 Replacement TeS 2 264224 45465 9929 59 es 311 Reporting Safety Defects sa vsu diu co xcd ces 448 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 184 199 Restraint Head gv esee a 6 Ke a BY Ow 2 126 Restraints Child 422222222255 25364 3x3 xS 60 65 Restidiits CODGBDODIE 2 caneus dae ce eee mee ens 97 Rotation Tires oiu 45 dete bee e doE u 3 323 O15 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 73 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 76 Safety Defects Reporting 6444 peu iue Ed RES 448 Saf
88. 4 66 5056 Sob boas kiki ded 292 Pa e Beck erer eieren eee 398 Master CV Dd s desc id b aH dee aii 398 POUKMIS 222x293 99 Rap A PULS A Bua d dd ACER A 289 Marb Light i422 227 xu dd tne re tHe 187 Brake Transmission Interlock 267 Bulb Replacement 11s des a HG tire timis 416 DUIS EI DE ous seegi weg E ie eyaes eo ax 76 415 Cab Top Clearance DIS lS dass a grim ere OS ee s 420 Calibration CORDISS 4 4 4 4 sche mr d P Bra 204 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 422 Capacities Fluid 434 vtney ose eee 89934 422 Caps Filler CULCEBSIUE 4 446468 ex Sed sees PROP S 383 POWeP SEUS uoa ska 34 ERES PESCE ae ee es 289 Radiator Coolant Pressure 995 ACIES sea preiera kipina eee 405 456 INDEX M Carbon Monoxide Warning 79 921 Sob PC 144 Cellular PRONE 24422458 iux uee aS SEE NES 88 247 Center High Mounted Stop Light 419 Center Lap Bells 140 5 3 iode bus 9 53 i 46 Center Seat Storage Compartment 166 Cer ncanonm Edel os ages Rach see nea nes nos 324 Chart Tire OZING 66 4442 Ge Reh de ene oe RR 296 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 189 379 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety eds ewe sas 72 CHECKS odlely A 72 Child Restraint 0000005 60 61 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 64 67 Child Seat 2 ee 61 65 di Ligier P ea hey epee eet ke ee 160 Cleaning W
89. 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV four wheel drive system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or comes on during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 10 TOWIHAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the red center stack switch bank This light will illumi nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected 11 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi o mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 12 Oil Pressure Gauge If Equipped The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer 13 OdometerlTrip Odometer Button Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the trip odometer display Holding the button in resets the trip odometer reading when in trip mode 14 Odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area Odometer Display The odometer shows the t
90. 752 Power Seat Switches 1 Power Seat Switch 2 Power Seatback Switch Adjusting the sear forward or rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Adjusting the seat up or down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position Tilting the seat up or down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when you have reached the desired position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Reclining the seatback WARNING Continued The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or WARNING Continued rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward Do not ride with the seatback reclined ni that the the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release shoulder belt ned longer resting against your the switch when you have reached the desired position chest In an accident you could slide under the seat WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat
91. A A 384 Se CsSCSCSC C C IGeNIMICAUON LOCO 24442644 ES aes oahu 383 Materials Added to 43 322 9 RE 4CR bebe gees 384 Pressid GAUDE ces asp d cee eet seo 182 Recommendation 2 eem dos op Rem do e d 383 DUDUIELIE sx saa a qp a eat a heal a q udo 384 bore o A rP LPP 383 Onboard Diagnostic System 5 378 3979 Opetating Precautions elsascis kescme ia 378 Operator Manual Owner s Manual i Outside Rearview Mirrors 82 usn PC coe ea Oe es 272 Overdrive OPE DWIHCH serere BEES 604452284 272 Overhead Console as iess ce icm hens 155 Overheatno PNDC 4o ddr kent ete bee a 180 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 449 Paice slat 65 epee eke ginie oes wae 24 Pathe Drake 2st PESO one RES EE 289 Passe DIS B oe dde trees aeee dae FOIE db d 146 Pedals Adjustable 5 2939 309 5b a4 erit tiio 149 Personal SANNES sess d 9948 EXP eee eens ee ga 205 ets x cos iaces 9 asd deen owe eS MENS s 71 Pets ITaN SOLDE ene aou acd X ao be he is Red 71 Phone Cellular x 99 amp bain oak elk ubire ird 88 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 88 Placard Tire and Loading Information 300 Power POOT LOKS Gudae gvacodeyeteuattege eas 30 MIOT sercat oes oe eae s m 84 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 157 160 c 127 oliding Rear WINdOW as aerea 3o e es 172 vicc MEM 288 289 onmino P S 34 Power Steere Fluid 424451
92. AKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Remote Start Abort Message on Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped The following messages will display in the EVIC if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema turely e Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low e Remote Start Aborted System Fault The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON RUN position To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn x2 will chirp twice if programmed Once the vehicle has started the engine will run for 15 minutes NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING Y
93. AN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticed During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod e Preset 1 Playlists e Preset 2 Artists e Preset 3 Albums e Preset 4 Genres eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 e Preset 5 Audiobooks e Preset 6 Podcasts e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST butt
94. AR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights if equipped that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial house hold type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do n
95. Axles refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not re quired When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected When checking the fluid level 4500 5500 only the vehicle should be in a level position The fluid level 1 4500 5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug should be 1 4 in 1 4 in 6 4 mm 6 4 mm below the 2 4900 5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug 0 fill hole on the front axle The fluid level should be level Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte with the bottom of the fill hole on the rear axle nance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information NOTE The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components Operation of the vehicle in water as may be encountered in some off highway types of service will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage Limited Slip Differentials DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip oil additive friction modifiers NOTE Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential on concrete or dry pavement These conditions should be considered normal operat
96. Brake Release 7 115v Power Inverter Outlet 8 Power Outlet 9 Lower Switch Bank 10 Cup Holders 11 Climate Controls 12 Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 040105708 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE Omp S D ie 25 279 y BRAKE C D RP RND AE i HAUL 4WD Ur T 040307722 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM 60 0 7 70 Cn 80 30 MPH 90 km h 161 00 m1 1 0 FM 103 5 Fuel Economy gt ACC 200 km h A Trip Info 25 HA A CS 040307723 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either 1 Tachometer indicator flashes at a rapid rate The Tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per 3 Fuel Gauge minute Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON RUN position SUAE 4 Temperature Gauge Do not operate the engine with the tachometer The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera pointer at high RPM for extended periods Engine ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that damage may occur the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed t
97. C 186 tae IURE 12534 EA ooo PR CUURUSE EE ER V 317 NeGUINCIICONS 2 595492 35899 99 69 birai 317 Tank G0 el a ee ee ee ee PETS 422 BUSS 5804 Ss Hee ee eA 410 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 0 323 378 Gasoline Fuel 2aenceedseea04eex edhe ends 317 Gasoline Reformulated 318 Gauges Coolant Temperate 6455442042 ene stars 179 PHOL 5325219 9x eS X Np d E E E RE E E 179 Silk DI 182 DPecdOMelCh fhe indies eae Dee hone oe ey 180 TaCHOMICIER se 45555444 Sw bei ven P VR 179 beni 34 2 CC ms 186 edt Ranges PPP ER 270 General Information 542222 e ims Glass Cleaning P m Grocery Bas Retainer 2222429552 9y 5er RIT Gross Axle Weight Rating ise dit RET 48s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ee CSsSCSC CSCsCis Guide Body Builders a bagyeudag sah eeeneaaes 6 CVV sueaceee eee ese eee aseas E RES 324 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 88 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 2 6 245 285 Hazard Warning Flasher sue dem eR 84954 356 Head Restraints 944499 9 s9Te23qe4 126 Heade DiS PL 416 Automa uon 6 bee UOI E EX Sou E des 141 Clean 44 V eeu wee eed PHEQUR PRAE PR AE 408 bolt D OH e cucscetcam dw esei hdc ac eee a 146 High Beam Low Beam Select 5witch 146 Liens On Remuncer xu 330 aor eri ides ou ss 144 Passe 2445 0 icine DT 146 DUCI au 55 554s oe eee PTBE TENET TAS 141 Heated Mi
98. CC anes eu eyes ete eee aye eee Fea 407 Cimate GOD 2e soe e a5 eae eu dias piati 247 an Prom 212221 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 246 Sono P PCT 203 Compass Calibration isses eso REX TREES 204 Compass Variance uox 6 3 5 ups 3 pour et akis 204 Computer TH ravel ose soe sare oi eee pO R3 201 Connector CS Tr 23b Universal Consumer Interface UCI 299 Console Overhead eee 155 Contract Seryice ace wore dcs 9 3 SK OG PEW 447 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 395 Sonic M 392 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 394 Coolant Capacily a urs adobe giai deno eee 422 Coolant Level ax 22 ee XX eee LY 393 396 Disposal of Used Coolant 396 Drain Flush and Refill 393 loe seio 24 44454806 T 396 ee INDEX 457 Points to Remember 4 95 9 396 Presse des o 295 ISQcld IDE d dices gas anra e dea S as 995 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 393 423 Cruise Control Speed Control 152 oisi rm 162 Customer Assistance eee 445 Data Recorder Event llle 59 Daytime R ning Lights 12229 rm ien 145 Dealer Service uu 60 04 dcc aos OS iow qose Eg HC cn 380 Defroster Rear Window 171 Defroster Windshield 74 250 255 Delay Intermittent Wipers 147 Differential Limited Slip 6 nuces reae iac 284 Dipsti
99. ERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming mes sages e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the connec tion can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Voice Tree Main Menu Recent Towing gency English p Uconnect Francais Md See Setup Read Send 3 Phonebook Flowchart Messages Messages Flowchart Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underline
100. ERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Program Type 16 Digit Character Display By pressing the SEEK
101. G YOUR VEHICLE 379 the SELECT button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a
102. GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi cles GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 Tire Size The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight an
103. General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures e Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ee e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake brake controller is not required system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of ma 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for addi tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident accident CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this Integrated Trailer Brake Module If Equipped could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher Your vehicle may have a Integrated Trailer Brake Module brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances for electric trailer brakes NOTE This module has been designed and veri
104. H Deactivating Electronic Speed Control 153 O Multifunction Lever use imos eR PEE ps 145 O To Resume Speed ese acie 9er EX PE ES 153 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 146 O Varying The Speed Setting xw nace 154 O Windshield Wipers lees 146 o To Accelerate For Passing 154 o Windshield Washers llus 147 W Overhead Console If Equipped 155 ELNBSLTOADUHE o9 v teg dean em aueh ay EIE P 148 DO Courtesy Reading Lights sc4 e 99x ex 155 IN Tilt Steering Column uie eri mde acs 148 W Electrical Power Outlets 157 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee W Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver I POUIDDEG ats hee Pober does Khe eee eee eis 160 W Power Inverter If Equipped 160 EM UPS ues ap eua ee ee vor 162 D Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats 0 0 0 162 D Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor ootate Di eiea eae ire dei aes oe rie 163 B Rear Cupholder Crew Cab 163 Mee RP 164 HGlove DOX SOALE equ Sede a de er 164 APOO PULO sss oe RARER EE E eae 165 O Center Storage Compartment If Equipped H Seatback Storage O Storage Regular Cab O Storage And Seats Crew Cab O Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models ll Rear Window Features O Rear Window Defroster H Power Sliding Rear Window If Equipped o Manual Sliding Rear Window If Equipp
105. HEDULES 435 88 000 Miles 147 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 147 000 km I Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 436 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 160 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing O C O O
106. INTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx ee 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil L Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 173 000 km only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect exhaust system damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MAINTENANCE SC
107. IOD Spare may result in a dangerous electrical system over Yellow load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 VEHICLE STORAGE NOTE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days we e When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully recommend that you take the following steps to mini seated the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a mize the drain on your vehicle s battery full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the e Disconnect the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse located in DUIS oon Sate Ore conor the Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment The IOD cavity includes a snap in re tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without removing it from the fuse block As an alternative to the above steps you may discon nect the negative cables from both batteries Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of When the vehicle is shipped from the factory the IOD fuse is in the up or extracted position If the radio interior lamps keyless entry or other features do not work with the key OFF check the position of the fuse or check to see if the fuse is blown to ensure that it is fully seated When the IOD fuse is extracted the instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis play NO FUSE service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system
108. Into Neutral Electronic Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 350 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Shift automatic transmission into PARK 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission 6 Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button located by the selector switch The NEUTRAL indicator light will blink while the shift is in progress The light will stop blinking stay on solid when the shift to NEUTRAL is complete 7 After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light stays on release the NEUTRAL button 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 10 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 11 Repeat steps 9 and 10 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear 12 Turn OFF the engine 13 Firmly apply the parking brake 14 Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear not in Neutral
109. Lene eae antag tag hess 266 Automatic Transmission 268 Tanseer Case 4446444 es eee EERE ERER 277 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case INPUNE MECRRRETERTTSTISTTCOURISITT 346 349 A INDEX 47 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N cea gaat eat d T PIRE trurit 348 352 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 46 Shoulder Belts llle 38 Pigtails THEN 42 95 2 39 os Bea ae 76 145 179 Sliding Rear Window OWC 225552 44406 95 ces PAS E Rari ie m dona 172 Snow Chains Tire Chains 313 Snow Plow a oa aee 6 Ge eee eee OG ee a oes 340 Snow Tires eaa ede 3094 3088 4 4 dod d en Phe RS 315 oe TMCS 2 664 og p oe ETTET boda doped EEE 423 Speed Control Cruise Control 152 DDGCUDHIGEBE a qood Lone esu seus Ot Eire Sees 180 StU baw ease EERU eee ye eee eee EN ET 26 263 Automatic Transmission ls 263 Engine Fails tO Start usas a doen A eens os 264 REMO A T 26 Starting Procedures Gas Engines 263 Steel Carcass Ply TIES 5 cas oranda g orig aes 306 Steering VOWED 42464006 RG oo OSG Se ee ees 288 289 Wheel Heated accs e64 a0 4 feos ee oaere eee 151 Wheel Tilt uu uua mcm RE pb ROSA 148 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 245 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System conu d PT 245 Storage Compartment Center Seat 166 Morace VODICE Yaa caeea ces 98 a haw ayes 257 415 DIOS Your VELIS oeque 3 are S09 ep Rer RR ee
110. M A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Standard Blade Ignition Key If Equipped Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition system The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided standard blade key into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN If Equipped The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are OFF ACC and ON RUN The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automati cally returns to the ON RUN position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency
111. Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the i VR button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejec
112. O O O C O L L L L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 437 104 000 Miles 173 000 km or 112 000 Miles 186 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 186 000 km Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 173 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary only Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Flush and replace the engine coolant if damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary not done at 60 months Flush and replace power steering fluid M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 120 000 Mile
113. OUR VEHICLE ie NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote otart request To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System if equipped Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob into the ignition swich Once inserted the message Turn To On will flash in the EVIC until you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Remote Start Comfort Systems If Equipped When remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For m
114. TING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer CAUTION Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always WARNINCG remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the keys in Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC ienal i he Key Fob the ignition A child could operate power win a Nes PONG a a MOM dows other controls or move the vehicle NOTE Do not leave children or animals inside parked The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position cause serious injury or death e If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC the EVIC will display Key In Ignition 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked
115. VEHICLE M Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi tion of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection The manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 WARNING The air i
116. Vehicle Identification Number NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN 010806541 INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS L CUWARNINGI MN Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 12 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN IP EUP lt lt aranse hub Y veio os Iro ose uten 12 ARY FOR P HT 13 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 14 O s y In dgpnition Reminder seesseketiucev s 15 IN Sentry Key zuiasvsuuuten esas res uu dae ward 16 O Replacement Keys crsa da dh PY Res 17 O Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped EL Rearming Of The System ouai on sa ao oa ETO Arm he Syste srepet errr een ss H To Disarm The System 22a ce ties eR S Bl Illuminated Entry If Equipped lll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped Olo Unlock The Doors 25s ex Rex o To Lock The Doors sve xad er 3 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M D Remote Open Window Feature NONE 6264454454 245554542 40446452 34 It EGuIBped 43 2 446 944204enene bane ese es 29 o Power Windows If Equipped 34 O Use The Panic Alarm ss aa e444 ardor 24 o Wind Buff
117. ains Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of your 4X2 trucks NOTE e The use of class U chains is permitted on the front and rear of 4X4 vehicles trucks with dual rear wheels and LT235 80R17E tires e On 4X2 vehicles class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped with LI245 70R17 LI265 70R17 and LI235 80R17 size tires e On 4X4 Single Rear Wheel SRW vehicles class U snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels only on vehicles equipped with LT265 70R17 CAUTION Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of SRW Single Rear Wheels equipped with LT245 70R17 LT265 70R17 tires or 4X4 front tires of vehicles equipped with LT265 70R17tires There may not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 SNOW TIRES Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc tion as the front tires Consult the manufacturer of the snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed requirement associated with the tire These tires should always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity inflation pressures under any load condition While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire typ
118. all The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more
119. als known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer en FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 449 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153
120. ampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 92 160 128 144 112 MPEG Audio 94 22 05 16 96 80 64 56 48 y 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 pla
121. and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the amp vr button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the e button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be playe
122. annot fall into the coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Continued driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If required mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and
123. aoe s SOR E eee doe 356 Jusp SHIELD 2s echt ee ees eee see aes EE 366 key Programing ursa 443 EXC eee ane yas 17 Key Replacement uus aos dI A iioi eiea 17 Key Sentry Immobilizer 4 24x eem sid 16 Kevin Reminder s es39 22d S ond tinishi 15 Keyless Entry OV stem 2 592 59 9 9 9 eukin Sy e E 20 c TOTO 12 Lane Change and Tum Signals 45 5 s 145 Lone Change Assist 444 9556 pd PR hens pees 146 Pool CP a ee Se pe eee oe are 46 Lap Shoulder Belts 44 x usus ee robos ears amp 65 38 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 64 linn PDT 76 Leaks Fluid 22a eR eA REA E ES 76 Eneo Wiles ETE P m 310 FICHE DUDE sedapp ian mcd p Hed dior didit d en 76 hr M Sang e om SRG oe a PS eee ee oe 76 140 POAC an gy Bed RA EAS ee 55 59 74 190 ir 2 C Ge eee e ee cee ses see 182 AMU LOCK 22223 hb aee ee rier eiii 190 Anti Lock Wang 2a ce 9 nog Gore Ged meets 293 Automatic Headlighis 4 vacare te cha seas 141 Brake Warning ua eed 395 8 PLES RR APPS 187 Bile Replacement 4456642449262 400402 415 416 Cap lop Clearance 2 59 oui 263 034 AS dedo uo I 420 CUISO ee ee RETOURS PAS DS 144 Center Mounted DIOD 454444044 4 breed d 419 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 189 Courtesy Redding uoracsckcos ddp RP we n n os 155 Daytime Running s scs a eot Sih deg 3m tai 145 EKTO PR ETE COEERETIERSTTRISRLRTOIT 76 FOO A sane tee eek ss aoe Ges eA 142 190 418 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 278 Hazard Wa
124. ar a lap belt low and snug How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode If Equipped 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in now in the Automatic Locking Mode the shoulder belt How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can
125. as been deactivated Auto Lock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Auto Unlock Doors When this feature is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Unlock Sequence When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears RKE Linked To Memory When this feature is selected the memory seat mirror and radio settings wil
126. ase Neutral N position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move 6 Start the engine even if the transmission is in PARK The parking 5 Shift the transfer case lever into Neutral N brake should always be applied when the driver is 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE not in the vehicle 8 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is CAUTION no vehicle movement 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral N before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 10 Turn OFF the engine 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop Het OPO ate pario eee 348 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 12 Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear not in Neutral CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in Neutral N and the engine running With the trans fer case in Neutral N ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 13 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 14 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 15 Release the parking brake Shifting Out of Neutral N Manua
127. assengers safe too Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap picama m S 022605547 Latch Plate To Buckle T 022605546 Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so t
128. at belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in an accident The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the Crew Cab rear seat outboard positions LATCH equipped seating positions feature both lower anchor bars located at the back of the seat cushion and tether strap anchorages located behind the seat back refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor 022605619 Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Be
129. at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will REPLACEMENT BULBS ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No possibility of compressor damage when the system is Overhead Console Lamps I52122 started again Dome Lamp 642644 Pep Ow nos dea baba dp iere D S 7679 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 921 L OSOLOTHD 2s aote E sees Pod RE Cp RP sos 9145 Dual Headlamp a2 42066 ditor d Pedo as Sa Bad H13 Quad Headlamp Low Beam H11 Quad Headlamp High Beam 9005 Side Marker Dual Headlamp 3157K Side Marker Quad Headlamp 3157NA Rear Cargo EID nuns eo Y cx o Ru icd OU dE i P awi 921 Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA BULB REPLACEMENT Dual or Quad Headlamp Front Park and Turn Signal If Equipped 1 Open the hood 2 Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable 3 Remove the four plastic push in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges 4 Remove the two plastic push in rivets that secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator 5 Remove the upper radiator seal from the
130. ate This prevents you from accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Auto Lock Doors If Equipped If this feature is enabled your door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h Auto Lock Doors Programming The Auto Lock Doors feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings System Setup in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this programming procedure 3 Place the Key Fob into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the Key Fob from the OFF position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the OFF position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door LOCK switch 6 Asingle chime will be heard to indicate the feature has been disabled 7 To reactivate this feature repeat the above steps 8 If a chime is not heard pro
131. ate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in A C mode and the ATC is set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix Bi Level or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or C amp S high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control knob when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the Floor Defrost Mix and Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection a
132. ause severe damage to the transfer case Automatic transmissions must be placed in the PARK position for recreational towing Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not in Neutral for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL Otherwise internal damage will result Continued 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case causing damage to internal parts Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged Shifting Into Neutral N Manual Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING 2 Turn OFF the engine 3 Press and hold the brake pedal You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the 4 Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or Neutral N position without first fully engaging the depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission parking brake The transfer c
133. aximum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear Wheel remaining on the ground You could lose control of the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface This could cause both rear wheels to spin and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the car in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive
134. b socket or the lamp wiring CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it NOTE There are access covers over both headlamp bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing if equipped These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL With Cargo Lamp 2 Separate the connector holding the housing and wir harness to the body ing 1 Remove the two screws holding the housing lens to the body as shown 3 Turn the desired bulb socket 1 4 turn and remove the socket and bulb from housing 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket e Inside Bulb Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 5 Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 1 Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp 80d27b7a CAUTION Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result e Outside Bulbs Cargo Lamps Ne MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 2 Rotate the socket 1 4 turn and pull it from the lamp 3 Pull the bulb straight from it s socket and replace assembly 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES F
135. ba cena th ie oy es 23 992 PL Brake eyelet P eireas a naai 398 O Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid evel 400 Aranesi dee PP 401 O Automatic Transmission 402 D Appearance Care And Protection From CONOS 422 v sod x03 V EOD SRL SE E SES 405 eS TT 410 O Totally Integrated Power Module 410 W Vehicle Storage leeren 415 l Replacement Bulbs 415 W Bulb Replacement lt cse RES 416 D Dual Or Quad Headlamp Front Park And Turn Signal If Equpped x 5b aree an 416 O Fog Lamps If Equipped 418 H Center High Mounted Stoplamp CHMSL Tan Carbo Lampe ss eee dae ee dn wi 419 H Cab Top Clearance Lamps If Equipped 420 W Fluid Capacities 00 4 422 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 423 minio PPM 423 EMCISSSIS ndr u ete e t EE SS ee de E 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 5 7L i OG 5 071405704 1 Air Cleaner Filter 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 Integrated Power Module 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Engine Coolant Reservoir 6 Battery 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control syst
136. bag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Airbag e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger if equipped airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC The first stage infla
137. blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the Manual Seat Adjuster If Equipped vehicle Both front seats are independently adjustable forward or rearward and are equipped with a seatback recliner The manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is found under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat Pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or backward to move the seat into the most comfortable 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie position then release the handle to lock the seat into WARNING position Using body pressure move forward and rear ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is latched dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Manual Reclining Seats If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion and is used to adjust the seatback position To adjust the seatback lift upward on the handle lean back on
138. but can shift down to 2 second gear or 1 first gear when needed Column Shift Lever STARTING AND OPERATING 269 On vehicles equipped with 5 7L engines use of ERS or TOW HAUL mode also enables an additional under drive gear which is not normally used during through gear accelerations This additional gear improves vehicle performance and cooling capability when towing a trailer on certain grades In ERS mode first through third gear are underdrive gears and fourth gear is direct drive ERS fifth gear Overdrive is the same as the normal fourth gear When in the DRIVE position in first through fourth gear the first tap down will display the ERS designation for the current gear the transmission will not downshift For example if you are in DRIVE and are in third direct gear when you tap the shift lever switch one time in the direction the display will show 4 ERS 4 is direct gear Another tap down will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 the added underdrive gear When in the DRIVE position in fifth gear the first tap down will downshift 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ee the transmission and display 5 ERS 5 is the same as normal fourth gear Another tap down will shift the transmission down to ERS 4 direct gear To exit ERS mode press and hold the top of the switch shift lever in the direction until D is once again highlighted in the instrument cluster display
139. button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type
140. can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select TOW HAUL mode if equipped or select a lower gear using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature NOTE Using TOW HAUL mode or a lower gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend trans mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Tow Haul To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat ing turn the TOW HAUL feature ON when driving in hilly areas or select a lower gear range using the Electronic Range Select ERS feature on more severe erades 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the fo
141. cause the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle e f your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting Installing the Child Restraint System WARNING child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow Do not install child restraint systems equipped with LATCH attachments in the center posi
142. ccess in the original carrier and location While driving you may experience abrupt stopping rapid accelera tion or sharp turns A loose jack tools bracket or other objects in the vehicle may move around with force resulting in serious injury Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and sliding the assembly from under the seat 4500 5500 Models These vehicles do not come equipped with a jack zm NOTE Jacking and tire changing on 4500 5500 models should be performed by an authorized dealer or knowl edgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy duty equipment like a tire service company Jack Location 358 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES xe Preparations For Jacking 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if the right front wheel is being changed block the left WARNING ER rear wheel 7 n 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas k EM UN SS ate srn 4 WIS MITT TTD N TA 233 BRN DETT i iil Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle the road to avoid the danger of being hit when when the vehicle is being jacked operating the jack or changing the wheel Jacking Instructions 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Instructions
143. cents the system may not always work for some combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be speaking the digit string make sure to say Send compromised with the convertible top down e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is Far End Audio Performance not in motion is recommended _ e Audio quality is maximized under e It is not recommended to store similar sounding E NEE AERTS PE VARE names in the Uconnect Phonebook 5 low to medi hicl d e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo dis d E cal name recognition rate is optimized when the e low road noise entries are not similar e smooth road surface 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Mi
144. cks Automatic Transmission 403 POWer EGO see 4u tenses Geese pet ee es 289 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant si ue ee 396 Door LOGS PP ET 29 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 285 Dual Rear Wheels 2223 22h bte 84 44 316 363 Electric Rear Window Defrost 2522s ys 171 Electrical Power Outlets oae 4 eee 9 dee Bert oe iod 157 Electronic Range Select ERS v3 m dee sae Ys we 268 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 152 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 192 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case 278 Emere cny Bloke aia oecsaeonce awe eas nea Sd 289 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ias s ps 4284 42 370 Hazard Warning Flasher uud oed eo es 356 Jump Starting 458 INDEX M low Hooks e 3 dunk ard tipai pekih 371 ici eeek RS R os O72 Emission Control System Maintenance 379 426 ENGIN TTE 377 ACIC 2 gen Adie 2 eke bua SS PPP Pd 384 Block Feal 2usuuca oe dor REESE EA neve 265 Break In Recommendations 71 Compartment Identification 377 Coolant Antifreeze 0 00000 423 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 79 021 Fiocded tant 432 9309 heen d 99 P P RU 264 Jomp DOE s ak ee bg eee eee hae es 366 v E 382 423 OLE Cap soa tse hens CIRC RH E 383 OU SEIGCUDII a 6 5 eee t Cu od EORR ob Brera ar cde ee d 383 CIESUDIBOBO sirisser estii RACER ERR ee 384 Temperature Gauge
145. cle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 302 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this re
146. connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e It may be necessary to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connecting the cable e f the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List t
147. coolant to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze per formance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System In order to assure brake syst
148. ction to the Uconnect Phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries i
149. d Door ajar Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled System fault Remote start disabled Turn key Remote start active Key to Run Remote Start Disabled Start Vehicle to Reset Remote Start Active Insert Key and Turn to RUN Memory 1 Profile Set Memory 2 Profile Set Memory System Unavailable Not in Park ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 e Memory System Unavailable Seatbelt Buckled e Memory 1 Profile Recall e Memory 2 Profile Recall e Adjustable Pedals Unavailable Vehicle in Reverse e Adjustable Pedals Unavailable Cruise Engaged e To Tow Vehicle Safely Read Neutral Shift Procedure in Owners Manual EVIC Warning Lights e Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more door may be ajar e Oil Pressure Warning Light wi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood e Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and
150. d 030607515 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed One Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Phonebook Current Number is played Enter Number New Entry Added Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming i ini Device Towing p i g Voice Training Pairing Emergency r Announcement Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol temporarily or Francais Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones Select phone ES esa to be deleted s ongs P System System Lists All Phones Prompts on off Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Voice Commands Primar language send 0 o 000000 0 000 list name
151. d Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary Child Restraint Tether Anchor Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con nection to tether anchors have been available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will provide add on tether strap
152. d fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 15 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi wee tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will s
153. d in reverse gear the side mirrors tilt downward to allow the driver to see into the previous blind spot and avoid objects in close proximity to the rear of the vehicle To 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Remote Start Comfort Sys When this feature is selected and the remote start is activated the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather In warm weather the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the key is turned to RUN To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating I
154. d 415 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information 313 b ntebe Png me Ol sa xr d dado ERR ORA 384 Syste ISemole at Ule sod stes or x doe e a x cu 26 Tac DOMCE a 5 6 uia oe eae oh des eiu rede Been 179 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 252 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 179 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 64 67 Tilt Steering Column Vip orth 34239998209 1295 9995 932 5 35 263 Tire and Loading Information Placard 300 313 Tire Identification Number TIN 298 Tite Marines xnxcyuonmdes ax pippa d SUP gent eee c 294 Tire Safety Information ic a wes x o doen eae s 294 JUS 219202605 cee sees cheese eee IE 76 304 451 Pome Wie Or lites 2524 eub en pecan ed oe an 310 ATS UTE 12533599 Gt hGH REE Eee HS 304 eru ee ee a ee eee ee eee 219 Dual a er a a er ee 316 363 General Information 304 lei eee 2s ete ERU eons EUROS APER es 308 Inflation Pressures uus hose ee kept es 305 iter Or Mires zu aix ise t E Le RUE E uM 310 Load CaDdCIBE d4 3 se dara de EO d Eo es 300 301 OUO Grading carierei a spia HE a ees 451 Ra ial p lt 8625655 844085 RT 309 Replacement 19d EA bee RSS es os oTi iw cuoi P i 315 scio C 294 304 DIZ TrP 296 xu Ei CRIT 315 OPUS aeseaosatcscoroe uy d ek ok aos AR SCIRE REED 309 ores C areas P saree dy 6 Pots A board ed ACE UA 306 Tread Wear Indicators 22x hes 310 Wheel Nut Iorque usremadaa Fic ESqUEP ES
155. d battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key fob is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor the Normal Starting procedure should be repeated After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de crease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a erounded three wire extension cord 3500 Models 5 7L Engine Only The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap It also has a c clip that is used for storage when not in use for the winter months During winter months remove the heater cord wiring assembly from it
156. d location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci dents and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup e Y It also includes diagnostics that will ill
157. d regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 5 7L Gas Engine The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Due will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 427 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi nated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or 6 months whichever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message ca
158. d restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer their arm Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat WARNINGE O as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint WARNING Refer to Child Restraints e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder Always wear your seat belts even though you have belts properly airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel d
159. d starting point A GAIN setting of 6 is a good starting point for heavier loads 5 In a traffic free environment tow the trailer on a dry level surface at a speed of 20 25 mph 30 40 km h and squeeze the manual brake control lever completely 6 If the trailer wheels lockup indicated by squealing tires reduce the GAIN setting if the trailer wheels turn freely increase the GAIN setting Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup If towing a heavier trailer trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10 EVIC Display Messages The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display messages along with a single chime will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection trailer brake control or on the trailer Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION The ITBM module has been designed and verified for electric trailer brakes Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in damage to your vehicle trailer or other property WARNING The ITBM module has been designed and verifi
160. d status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Conti
161. d the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the t
162. d the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving 326 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review
163. d through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the VR button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the VR button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the amp vr button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electr
164. der names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names n nm e Level 1 12 including a separator character extension and a three n nm e Level 2 31 including a separator character extension and a three Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz s
165. diameter of the two individual tires must be compared If there is a significant difference the larger tire should be installed in a front location The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows 060505400 Tightening Pattern 8 Studs ay Xa 9 O 4 Day Tightening Pattern 10 Studs 1 Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a snug fit 060505669 2 Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table Go through the sequence a second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved Retighten to specifications at 100 miles 160 km and after 500 miles 800 km WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 365 It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval Wheel Nut Torque All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set All nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the nuts to final torque in increments Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut op
166. downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone also allows the user to download entries one at a time from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the amp button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept a single phonebook entry from your phone using the Bluetooth eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth conne
167. duces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 303 Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 Ibs wean ccu EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 Ib 865 Ibs us 1 0 0 Ins 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs minus 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 400 Ibs 811a4d11 304 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can
168. due to uneven tire wear low or uneven tire pressures excessive vehicle loading or cold tempera tures WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4H Four Wheel Drive High Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only N Neutral This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 4L Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loos
169. e hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is impor tant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age e Do
170. e and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open the doors This feature is only available if you have Remote Keyless Entry The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme right position 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE e The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the extreme left position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held radio transmitter with integrated key The transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 020207434 Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transm
171. e slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Shifting Procedure Manually Shifted Transfer Case 2H e 4H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 55 mph 88 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 2H or 4H 4L With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transmission into NEUTRAL While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL NOTE e Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift If difficulty occurs shift the transmission into NEUTRAL hold foot on brake and turn the engine OFF Make shift to the desired mode e Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur The preferred 278 STARTING AND OPERATING method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting
172. e RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Headlamps With Wipers When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain act
173. e STARTING AND OPERATING 321 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Many of these products contain high concentra Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed engine running for an extended period If the against you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Continued CAUTION Guard against carbon monoxide with aa ope e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitted aftermarket cap can cause t
174. e TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into
175. e at higher than normal temperatures Therefore when transporting the plow angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit Do not exceed 40 mph 64 km h The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance Operating Tips Under ideal snow plowing conditions 20 mph 32 km h should be maximum operating speed The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NOTE During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperature display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera ture The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera ture sensor caused by the snowplow In addition on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside tem perature display and ATC operation will return to nor mal when the snowplow is removed General Maintenance Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer s instructions Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion When plowing snow to avoid
176. e ee oes 4s 146 389 Windshield Wiper Blades 389 Windshield Wipers a s uides cae dr pa we x a9 d eg a 146 Wiper Blade Replacement 15 e 99 ord em ers 389 Wipers Intermittent ses duco d gane etes BS et s 147 re ZA EVE SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC i 11DD43 126 AC Second Edition Printed in U S A
177. e following pages for the required maintenance intervals ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 429 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km 1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only T Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary only Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 430 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se
178. e for 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who WARNING are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt e Rearward facing child seats must never be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 Ibs 18 Kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seat back they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the infant or child restraint It could come loose in an accident The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex lap shoulder belt actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be NOTE For additional information refer to used in a rear seat www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint
179. e from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver 034805613 Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter Bench Seat 1 Cigar Lighter 2 Ash Receiver For vehicles equipped with a floor console the cuphold ers may be used POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt 150 Watts Maximum outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel to the right of the radio This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playsta tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been r
180. e of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or
181. e or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner WARNING should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants at the start of each warm season This service should approved by the manufacturer for your air condi include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this flammable and can explode injuring you Other time unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to CAUTION Do not
182. e owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pres sure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Continued 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the d
183. e pull out tray on the center stack of the instrument panel Front Cupholders 035105612 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Front Instrument Panel Cupholders Floor Rear Cupholder Crew Cab Storage Bin Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders For vehicles equipped with bucket seats two cupholders located in the center armrest are located in the floor storage bin i m AN 035105803 Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder Cupholders 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie STORAGE To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle Glove Box Storage release The glove box door will automatically open The glove box is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper if equipped and lower storage area 035205587 Upper Glove Box 035205586 Glove Box Upper Glove Box If Equipped 2 Lower Glove Box ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 To open the lower glove box pull on the handle to release Door Storage the latch and lower the door Front Door Storage If Equipped Storage areas and bottle holders drivers side only are located in the door trim panels 035205588 Lower Glove Box 035205815 Front Door Storage 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Door Storage Crew Cab Center Storage Compartment If Equipped Storage compartments are located in both
184. e the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of an accident Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the large button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Hl lf NN 3 Adjusting Head Restraint Adjustable Rear Head Restraints Rear Head Restraints NOTE The rear center head restraint Crew Cab only is The outboard head restraints can be adjusted To raise the fixed and cannot be adjusted head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the large button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Power Seats If Equipped Some models may be equipped with driver and passen ger eight way power seats The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M There are two power seat switches that are used to control the movement of the seat cushion and the seat back 030905
185. e vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Flash Lamps with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Program mable Features System Setup in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System O
186. ear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the 4 LOW Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position the light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 8 4WD Indicator This light indicates the vehicle is in four wheel AWD drive and 4LOCK 4WD allows all four wheels to receive torque from the engine simulta neously 9 SERV Service 4WD The SERV
187. eces sary 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 22 Oil Pressure Warning Light wi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the ve
188. economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 24 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first e turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 25 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 26 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti lock Brake System ass ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required
189. ed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control lever under the mirror to the night position lever flipped toward the rear of vehicle A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 The mirror should be adjusted with the lever set in the day position lever flipped toward the windshield The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your
190. ed Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake status indicator Units Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Units displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of mea sure To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Compass Temperature Display The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing The EVIC will display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature NOTE e The system will display the last known outside tem perature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving e During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperature display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tem perature The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient temperature sensor caused by the snowplow In addi tion on vehicles equipped with Automatic Tempera ture Control ATC it is sug
191. ed for electric trailer brakes Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury NOTE e An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with air or electric over hydraulic trailer brake systems To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer e Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s wiring harness ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 WARNING Any work done to the vehicle s electrical system or wiring should be performed by a qualified automo tive technician If done improperly it may cause damage to the electrical system wiring and could result in serious or fatal injury Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range
192. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine running With the transfer case in NEUTRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 15 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 16 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar 17 Release the parking brake NOTE e The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL from the 2WD AUTO if equipped position Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Shifting Out of Neutral Electronic Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your v
193. efore retrying a selection make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met To retry the selection turn the control knob back to the current position wait five seconds and retry selection To find the shift require ments refer to the Shifting Procedure in this section for further information The SVC 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required WARNING Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SVC 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning as this can cause damage to driveline components When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provide
194. ehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button located by the selector switch until the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off 7 After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off release the NEUTRAL button 8 After the NEUTRAL button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch NOTE When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 9 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in Neutral 10 Release the brake pedal 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 12 Start the engine 13 Press and hold the brake pedal 14 Release the parking brake ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 15 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed If any of these requirements are not met prior to pre
195. em It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines e that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indicator will display in the EVIC telltale display area Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press eee MAINTAININ
196. em performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNINCG Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir On the outboard side of the reservoir there is a MAX dot and an MIN dot The fluid level must be kept within these two dots Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear However an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted Use only the manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399 WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to F
197. emoved from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings The power inverter switch is located on electrical devices prior to using the inverter on the switch bank below the Climate Controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once Press the switch a second time to turn the power outlet 035005840 Off NOTE e When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the power inverter status indicator turns on The status indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is producing AC power 035005813 e Due to built in overload protection the power inverter P I ter Outlet i j oye er HS will shut down if the power rating is exceeded 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING To avoid serious injury or death e Do not use a three prong adapter e Do not insert any objects into the receptacles e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CUPHOLDERS Front Instrument Panel Cupholders 40 20 40 Seats The cupholders are located in th
198. ems NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Crew Cab front center seating position have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock d
199. en you press the Voice Command EvR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EvR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command amp vR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command amp vr button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radi
200. enance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES attempting any procedure yourself The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per you have any doubt about your ability to perform a form repairs and service when necessary could service job take your vehicle to a competent me result in more costly repairs damage to other chanic components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qua
201. er as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals ployed If you are involved in another collision the They are not permanent and normally heal quickly airbags will not be in place to protect you However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor WARNING immediately Deployed airbags cannot protect you in another col e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like lision Have the airbags replaced by an authorized particles The particles are a normal by product of the dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant process that generates the non toxic gas used for Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind
202. er results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Your vehicle may experience a downshift automatic transmissions only while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery II III OVERHEAD CONSOLE IF EQUIPPED The overhead console is located on the headliner above the review mirror The overhead console contains the Donde i following features verhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger e Power Sliding Rear Window Switch If Equipped Compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position
203. er towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for the purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to the main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed Four Wheel Drive Vehicles CAUTION To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing always use one of the following methods damage your vehicle en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 373 NOTE The transfer case must be in the NEUTRAL position and the transmission must be in PARK auto matic transmission or in gear manual transmission to tow a four wheel drive vehicle unless all its wheels are OFF the ground The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly Two Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable tow with the transmission in NEUTRAL and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground Speed must not exceed 30 mph 50 km h and the distance must not exceed 15 miles 25 km CAUTION Towing faster than 30 mph 50 km h or for more than 15 miles 25 km can cause severe damage
204. es TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte On Off Road type tires mounted on the rear do not use nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if a front to back rotation pattern Instead rotate your tires desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear side to side at the recommended intervals should be corrected prior to rotation being performed Dual Rear Wheels aee C Y t o 055703771 055705948 Tire Rotation NOTE On Canadian vehicles only if your vehicle is equipped with All Season type tires on the front and Tire Rotation The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set STARTING AND OPERATING 317 To check if tires are even lay a straight edge across all FUEL REQUIREMENTS four tires The straight edge should touch all the tires The 5 7L engine is designed to meet all emissi
205. es while the ignition is OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off NOTE Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK This provides a constant Lights ON condition until the ignition is turned OFF The lights illuminate at less than 50 of normal intensity If the parking brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights DRL will turn OFF Also if a turn signal is activated the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation Once the turn signal is no longer active the DRL lamp will illuminate Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031505789 Turn Signal Lever NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without mov
206. eting 97 O Programming Additional Transmitters a W Occupant Restraints 00 37 D Transmitter Battery Replacement 24 3 Lap Shoulder Belts 38 O General Information 26 4049 46654214 EE RS 25 3 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 46 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 26 5 Center Lap Belts 46 E How To Use Remote Start 444s aca saa y 2s 26 3 Automatic Locking Retractor ALR Mode IM Door Locks aa d ur ed SURE Sou Rd 29 Ie Eouipped ea ccena ego k sudaa uuo cee RR 47 o Manual Door Locks 22222293929 aana 29 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Wpowerbusc tod Edu vaca ster 30 idu RP 48 B Child Protection Door Lock 32 Ka a oisi ndo a O Seat Belt Extender nnna aana aaa 49 O Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Wo RTT 49 0 Airbag System Components 51 H Advanced Front Airbag Features 91 D Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 54 D Event Data Recorder EDR 59 E Child Resuauus 22 99 0570 99 10 reiii onii 60 ll Engine Break In Recommendations ll Safety Tips D Transporting Passengers o Exhaust Gas O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The VEMICIC oiu cR E eee ehh eG heh we ene es O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
207. ety Exhaust Gas 466 INDEX M Dately IntormiatobD Ire 25s 2x9 ERTRSE RES 294 Daley C 72 Satellite Radio Antenna 232 241 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 240 Schedule Maintenance leen 426 Seat Belt Maintenance 409 Seat Belt Reminder us aeeiresepioe x39 08048 XR 48 Seat Belts 2 0 0 0 ee ee ee ee 37 38 73 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 And Pregnant WOMEN 26csa n 0 ee eee es 4 49 Child Restraint x2 2a uem E Hew dones 60 71 licec E 49 Front Seal MCCC 38 Ins pecHhoHi vette tae XX LIES V cee IRE T 73 Reminder 422232339 o oem e ergo 654 191 o 123 134 AdS prere 64550556024 ER RS CSS 129 Chibi aoe a ee eee RE SSORASES EAE ES ES 71 lal A 130 MOOD gaa 44 40 64 54 eu bE ou YEA ROS 134 ROWE 22292 6 xenon ee bobs Ree eee 127 Recieve ease ee aoe 44 PRSE RM qe 124 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 393 423 Sentry Key Immobilizer 6 2acesie ees oy avn S Res 16 Sentry Key Programming lt 2 05 0545 EHE GE ee baad 17 Sentry Key Replacement sd Rath deh t RE 17 Service Assistance 000 445 Service Contract aue eue ede X 309 ord dod a 447 Service Manuals 22s cw gp meh ep Eng 449 Perle Ihe JOBS uv ee sace iue ee RA RR GR 21222 Petes Personal 4 e ee ra ene nee e age pa eH oO 205 SMD chere cane ehe
208. ex A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 298 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highwa
209. f Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045105562 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center Pressing the top of the switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio CD or other valid audio source The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre set station that you have programmed in the radio pre set pushbuttons CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch o
210. f tires OP Or AONSGE IGI d one a wamaut on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle stopping when you are stuck poorly The instability could cause an accident result Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In ing in serious injury or death Always use radial ply Emergencies for further information tires in sets of four or six in case of trucks with dual WARNING rear wheels Never combine them with other types of tires Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in i m P P y age or failure A tire could explode and injure some the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Tread Wear Indicators These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the replaced tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this point Lif
211. fant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction ar
212. fied for electric trailer brakes To determine the type of brakes on your trailer check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer 057007590 1 GAIN Brake Output Power Display 2 Manual Brake Control Lever 3 Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light 4 GAIN Adjustment Buttons STARTING AND OPERATING 335 The user interface consists of the following GAINI Brake Output Power Display Shows the current GAIN setting This display may also be used to display diagnostic information if needed e SC Short Circuit to Ground e 5b Short to Battery e CF Controller Fault If this message appears on the display see your authorized dealer When the vehicle brakes are applied the display will no longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the trailer brakes Manual Brake Control Lever Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to activate power to the trailer s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle s brakes If the manual brake control 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ee lever is activated while the brake is also applied the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes The trailer and the vehicle s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
213. from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied the engine is off and the key fob is removed from the ignition switch Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear 290 STARTING AND OPERATING The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park brake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake pull the parking brake release handle 054105820 Parking Brake Release When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree
214. gested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside temperature display and ATC operation will return to normal when the snowplow is removed Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn ON the ignition switch 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass is displayed in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator wil
215. ght and instrument panel lights are also turned on To turn off the headlights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch to the A AUTO position 031405773 Automatic Headlight Position When the system is on the Headlight Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position To turn the automatic headlights off turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Headlight Delay To aid in your exit your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately 90 seconds This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is on and then the headlight switch is cycled off Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off or by turning the ignition ON The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features SETUP in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further informatio
216. ght side TUNE SCROLL control knob 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UND
217. gram mode was canceled before the feature could be disabled If necessary repeat the above procedure Auto Unlock Doors If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven shifted out of PARK and all doors closed Auto Unlock Doors Programming If Equipped The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis abled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings System Setup in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 2 Fasten your seat belt Fastening the seat belt will cancel any chimes that may be confusing during this programming procedure 3 Insert the Key Fob into the ignition 4 Within 15 seconds cycle the Key Fob from the OFF position to the ON RUN position a minimum of four times ending in the OFF position Do not start the engine 5 Within 30 seconds press the driver s door UNLOCK switch 6 A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has been changed 7 Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of this feature 8 If a chime is not heard
218. gs Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 1 Blower Control 9 DEFROST 2 Left Temperature Up 10 Right Temperature Down 3 SYNC Indicator 11 A C 4 Left Temperature Indicator 12 A C Indicator 5 Right Temperature 13 SYNC Temperature Button Indicator 6 DELAY Indicator 14 Left Temperature Down 7 Right Temperature Up 15 RECIRCULATE 8 MODE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Automatic Operation 1 Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel 2 Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posi tion on the ATC Panel 3 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front passenger temperature buttons Once the desired tem perature is displayed the system will achieve and auto matically maintain that comfort level 4 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic
219. h attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 5 000 lbs 2 268 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut Class IV Extra Heavy Dut Fifth Wheel Greater than 10 000 Ibs Gooseneck 4540 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drive train 5 000 Ibs 2268 kg 10 000 Ibs 4540 kg 330 STARTING AND OPERATING ee All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your vehicle your trailer hitch Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Traile
220. hat your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your WARNING abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in an accident The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in a vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 022605634 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Removing Slack From Belt The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the
221. he previous or next track If the lt lt SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list pressing this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See During Scan mode pressing the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables e Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the mode to repeat the current playing track iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Press the SC
222. he Electronic Speed Control System is on The following messages will be displayed on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation System EVIC if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out Adjustable Pedal Disabled Cruise Control Engaged or Adjust able Pedal Disabled Vehicle In Reverse CAUTION Adjustable Pedals Switch Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals Adjustment or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage 031605590 to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path 1 Position the driver s seat so that you are at least 10 in 25 4 cm away from the airbag located in the center of the steering wheel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked HEATED STEERING WHEEL IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically shutting off The heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already warm The heated steering w
223. he MIL every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate due to ADDING FUEL fuel vapors escaping from the system The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 in A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn 50 mm inside the opening If using a portable fuel on container it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to amp To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top force open the restricting door off the fuel tank after filling NOTE When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on NOTE Tighten the gas cap 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened If the gas cap is not tightened properly the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled STARTING AND OPERATING 323 WARNING A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the
224. he airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye or all of the following may occur irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passeng
225. he following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 866 726 4636 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 447 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac
226. he heated seats can operate on HIGH heat for as little as 4 minutes and up to 30 minutes before switching to LOW heat Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat setting it may operate for an additional 60 minutes before automatically shutting OFF The heated seats can shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is already warm Vehicle Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the driver s heated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Rear Heated Seats On some models the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a sec ond time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF 030905580 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 NOTE e Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes e The engine must be ru
227. he iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the lt lt RW button Holding the lt lt RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button e Asingle press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds e Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to t
228. he upper limits of the normal operating range 2 Turn Signal Indicators lt A The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 5 Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and or kilometers per hour mph km h 6 4 LOW This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four wheel drive LOW mode The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Low range provides a greater g
229. heel switch is located on the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the heated steering wheel The light on the switch will illuminate to indicate the steering wheel heater is on Pressing the switch a second time will turn off the heated steering wheel and light indicator 031705825 NOTE The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate Vehicles Equipped with Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start the heated steering wheel seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNINCG e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the steering wheel heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures espe cially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cush ion This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are
230. her a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045632842 Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode P Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mix Mode We Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use the DEFROST mode with maximum blower and warm temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the A C button is not pressed
231. hicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ee POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noi
232. hicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 23 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of I an onboard diagnostic OBDII system which monitors the emissions and engine control sys tem If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on as a bulb check until the engine is started If the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain on for 15 seconds then blink for 5 seconds and remain on until the vehicle is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the condition investigated promptly If this light comes on and remains on while driving it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel
233. high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Mirrors os ocu ex ere oe Pa RUE ce PSP SES P 81 O Slide On Rod Features Of Sun Visor B Inside Day Night Mirror 81 EUP a ee Ee 2 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 82 O Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped 87 O Outside Mirrors i22 40 em rb EE RSES 82 E Uconnect Phone If Equipped 88 D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 83 Operation eee ee 90 O Power Mirrors If Equipped 84 O Phone Call Features 0 0 98 o Heated Mirrors If Equipped g5 O Uconnect Phone Features 100 3 Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped 85 D Advanced Phone Connectivity 105 H Things You Should Know About Your Ueonnect PRONG a4 op ot acide x eg eis 107 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee O General Information 2 6acukesreptteewesa 118 H 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped 134 ll Voice Command If Equipped 118 W Driver Memory Seat
234. hone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the amp button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the VR button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the AVR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M best results the Voice Training session should be com Voice Comma
235. ice Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 40 000 miles 65 000 km LJ Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 48 000 miles 78 000 km If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 432 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter
236. ies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation When the Ve hicle Security Alarm is activated interior switches for door locks are disabled The system provides both au dible and visible signals for the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security Light will flash repeatedly For an additional 15 minutes only the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key is used to start the vehicle Use of the Sentry Key will disable the alarm Rearming of the System The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security Light flashing if the system has not been disabled If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present the system will ignore that condition and monitor the re maining doors and ignition To Arm the System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the power door locks or use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter
237. if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must move the shift lever back and forth without first leave the vehicle pulling it toward you after you have set itin PARK DRIVE Make sure itis in PARK before leaving the vehicle This range provides all forward gears including third It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK gear direct and fourth and fifth gear overdrive Refer to or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than Overdrive Operation Use this range for most city and idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake highway driving pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 2 2 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Overdrive Operation The Overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec tronically controlled fourth and fifth gear Overdrive The transmission will automatically shift from DRIVE to Overdrive if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant antifreeze has reached normal operating temperature e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL switch has not been activated e transmission has reached normal operating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started i
238. ildren Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seat back should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in an accident Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and shou
239. ile the wheel is still on the ground 360 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 3 When changing the front wheel assemble the jack When changing a rear wheel assemble the jack drive drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube Place the jack under the axle as close to extension tube Securely place the jack under the sway the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the bar bracket unless both tires are flat on one side then front Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench place jack under shock bracket facing forward in vehicle Connect the jack tube extension and lug wrench ANANASA S 060505397 Front Jacking Locations 060505668 Rear Jacking Location ee WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 361 Before raising the wheel off the ground make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required NOTE If the jack will not lower by turning the dial thumbwheel by hand it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack 4 By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off
240. ing beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on or shut the high beams off High Low Beam WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wipers The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed Windshield Wiper Washer Switch Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range 031505791 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles to a cycle every one second The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph 16 k
241. ing the mirror cover turns off the light G sw Eu L Power Mirror Movement Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated by pressing the rear window defroster button 030405625 030406878 Illuminated Vanity Mirror 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Slide On Rod Features of Sun Visor If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for addi tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun To use the Slide On Rod feature rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it Pull the sun visor along the Slide On Rod until the sun visor is in the desired position 030406879 Slide On Rod Extender ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Trailer Towing Mirrors If Equipped NOTE Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror entering an automated car wash head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra wide loads Io change position inboard or out board the mirror head should be rotated flipped in or out A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and can be adjusted separately A 030407657 Blindspot Mirror Trailer Towing Position 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle com
242. ing wheel to the full up position 268 STARTING AND OPERATING 3 Firmly set the parking brake 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver or other suitable tool press and hold the override tab through the access port ringed circle on the bottom of the steering column Interlock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Five Speed Automatic Transmission 545RFE 5 7L Engine Only The shift lever display located in the instrument panel cluster indicates the transmission gear range The shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the steering column if equipped or on the floor console if equipped You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of the PARK position To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position Pull the shift lever toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK or when shifting out of PARK Electronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position Move the console shift lever left or right or toggle the switch on the column shift lever down or up to select the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into 3 third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear
243. inued 292 STARTING AND OPERATING ee BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function However you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability the remaining system will still func tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica tion greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light if equipped during brake use Dual Rear Wheel Models Only The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro boost system during hard braking conditions NOTE Under cold temperatures pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System WARNING The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment It may be sus ceptible to interference caused by improperly in stalled or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified p
244. ion of the limited slip differential Transfer Case Drain and Refill Refer to Maintenance Schedule for proper maintenance intervals Lubricant Selection Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Transmission Selection Of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only the manufacturer s recommended trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION e Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued CAUTION Continued e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and fil
245. is light warns of an overheated engine condi wee tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for more information e SERV 4WD The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift SERV 4wD system If the SERV 4WD light stays on or 4 comes on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required e Transmission Temperature Light This light indicates that there is excessive trans mission fluid temperature that might occur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 light comes on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in
246. isposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the coolant recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 normally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot
247. istance Jo Empty DTE scutis 200 O EVIC Average Fuel Economy DUOBUS 23x unrd v Eres es aaa oo O Vehicle Info Customer Information Features 202 5105 ee ee ce ee EE 202 DO Compass Temperature Display 203 D Customer Programmable Features OUSIEHI SEMP wants pes dehi tapiki 205 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M lll Media Center 730N 430 430N RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped W Media Center 130 Sales Code RES H Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Sales Code RES RSC 2 000005 H Operating Instructions Radio Mode 210 D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 2a ae dedo otc e eed 226 o Notes On Playing MP3 Files 228 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 230 O Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 230 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio IE QUIDDCG uiuos we USO NP count 231 ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI 0 5 I EqUIDDEd odes we RSS am 3 0 E Pear 295 OConnec ng Tue iod osx eux ary gos 236 E Using Mis Feature scams date gore niers 236 O Cont
248. itter To Unlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Program mable Features System Setup in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside th
249. ive for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high lighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Illuminated Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted then press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the setting showing that setting has been selected Easy Exit Seat If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the door Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Tilt Mirror In Reverse If Equipped When this feature is selected and the shift lever is place
250. k slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals NOTE If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter s should be changed It is important that proper lubricant is used in the trans mission Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adver
251. key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 OFF 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON RUN 4 START 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission Turn the Key Fob to the OFF position and then remove the Key Fob NOTE then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side up For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STAR
252. l Shift Transfer Case If Equipped Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and turn it to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 4 Press and hold the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position NOTE When shifting out of transfer case Neutral N turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 7 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or place WARNING manual transmission in Neutral You or others could be injured if you leave the a ecaa La DARE Peden vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the 9 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from 11 Press and hold the brake pedal the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking 10 Start the engine Be aor DRUSI UI brake should always be applied when the driver is 13 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake not in the vehicle pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally CAUTION Shifting
253. l accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward u
254. l be displayed in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading For the most accurate compass performance the compass must be set using the following steps NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings N 12 VA vA 11 5 ow 10 4 6 8 9 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup Customer Programmable Features menu is reached then press the SELECT button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 3 Press the DOWN button until the Compass Variance message is displayed in the EVIC then press the SELECT button The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected
255. l return to the memory set position when the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UN LOCK button is pressed If this feature is not selected then the memory seat mirror and radio settings can only return to the memory set position using the seat mounted switch Io make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Horn With Remote Start When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button is pressed To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Horn With Remote Lock When this feature is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamps with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark ap pears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Flash Lamps With Lock When this feature is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with th
256. lar Cab The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs the length of the cab Storage Bin UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 Storage and Seats Crew Cab The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats Lift the seats to access the storage com partment To open the storage compartments lift upward on the handle of the latch and open the lid d Crew Cab Storage 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Always lift the storage compartment lids by using the handle Failure to lift the lids by using the handle can result in damage to the lids Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers Regular Cab Models Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab behind the seats Grocery Bag Hooks REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
257. ld be avoided 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory isa SAFETY TIPS high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil Pn uou De conse te wig ee diues NEVER TRANSPORT DASSENGERSTN Tap CARGD conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to S Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL WARNING Transporting Passengers OILS MUST NEVER BE USED e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may A new engine may consume some oil during its first few cause serious injury or death thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area considered a normal part of the break in and not inter inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people preted as an indication of difficulty riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious a
258. lders Guide 5 HOt Sama De are Ou TO r ety anetelees 1 The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two 2 The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded Before Plowing e Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level 3 Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of e Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight options or passengers etc ness 342 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The loaded vehicle weight including the snowplow system all aftermarket accessories driver passengers options and cargo must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight GVWR or Gross Axle Weight GAWR ratings These weights are specified on the Safety Com pliance Certification Label on the driver s side door opening NOTE Detach the snowplow when transporting pas sengers Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica tions at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow Front end toe in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season This will help prevent uneven tire wear The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip ment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer Over the Road Operation With Snowplow Attached The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operat
259. le then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 426 Bl Maintenance Schedule 426 PDs Gas BOSE voce a quiae Gore doe reysi 426 O Required Maintenance Intervals 428 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 426 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Boar
260. lear and open CAUTION e f you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa similar cause which destroys the paint and protective can result in damage or removal of paint and decals coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 e f you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush
261. les Equipped with Remote Start On models equipped with remote start the drivers ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start Refer to Remote Starting System If Equipped in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 40 20 40 Front Bench Seat If Equipped The seat is divided into three segments The outboard seat portions are each 40 of the total width of the seat The back of the center portion 2076 easily folds down to provide an armrest center storage compartment if equipped DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED Driver memory seats allow the driver to recall settings for the adjustable pedals mirrors seats and the radio presets using the key fob The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the drivers seat cushion 031105757 Memory Seat Buttons The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to recall the driver s seat position driver s outside mirror position adjustable brake accelerator pedals position Automatic Temperature Control ATC temperature set ting and radio station preset settings Your Remote ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can also be pro grammed to recall the same positions when the UN LOCK button is pressed NOTE The power lumbar option is not programmable with driver memory seats Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters One or both RKE transmitters
262. lified repair center Continued 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle
263. llowing actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily SNOWPLOW Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow NOTE Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Dodge Body Builders Guide See your authorized dealer installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information There are unique electrical systems that must be con nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems ee STARTING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING e Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear The cutting edge should be 1 4 to 1 2 in 6 cm to Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely 1 2 cm above ground in snow plowing position affect performance of the airbag system in an acci dent Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual e Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func tioning properly Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability For Information about snowplow applications visit ESSO www dodge com or refer to the current Dodge Body The Lamp Out indicator could illuminate if exte Bui
264. luids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M j Drain And Refill WARNING Continued On 4500 5500 vehicles remove the lower bolt to drain e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami the axle fluid nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level For models with 9 25 in Front Axles and 11 5 in Rear
265. m h or less Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer push the washer knob located on the end of the multifunction lever inward to the second detent Washer fluid will be sprayed until the washer knob is released from this position If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is re leased 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the washer knob located on the end of the multi function lever inward to the first detent The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off to clear road mist or spray from a passing vehicle TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the stee
266. mount of air dials and inner push knobs These comfort controls can forced through the system in any be set to obtain desired interior conditions mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control 045632841 clockwise from the OFF position NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the knob coun terclockwise from top center into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler 045632839 Front Blower 4 DEFROST Mode 2 Temperature Control 5 Air Conditioning A C 045632845 3 MODE Control 6 RECIRCULATION Control ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 temperatures Rotating the knob clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select eit
267. munications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other with out wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to
268. mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase o
269. n Parking Lights and Panel Lights DQ To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights rotate the headlight switch clockwise To turn off the parking lights rotate the headlight switch back to the O Off position Fog Lights If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by placing the headlight rotary control in the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control 031405775 Fog Light Switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 illuminate when the fog lights are on The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position or the high beam is selected Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch is rotated to the far right detent position or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way left to the OFF detent will cause all the interior lights to go out This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging
270. n be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Due in Under standing Your Instrument Panel or under Instrument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odometer in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu racy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 428 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ee Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Lubricate outer tie rod ends CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on th
271. n extremely cold tem peratures the transmission may not shift into Overdrive and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid temperature has risen to a suitable level If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot the transmission will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature If the transmission temperature becomes hot enough the Transmission Temperature Warning Light may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until the transmission cools down After cool down the transmis sion will resume normal operation The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approximately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent transmission shifting oc curs press the TOW HAUL switch This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When operating in the TOW HAUL mode fifth gear is disabled and 2 3 and 3 4 shift patterns are modified TOW HAUL Switch STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Shifts into Overdrive normal fourth gear are allowed during steady cruise for improved fuel economy and automatic closed throttle downshifts to di
272. n tether straps by raising the head restraints and reaching between the rear glass and rear seat The tether strap may be retained with an elastic band Accessibility to the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat cushion to the up position Remove the elastic before use if 022606561 2 Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat I 3 Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat 4 Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center seat and attach the hooks to the metal ring 5 Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and to the anchor directly behind the right seat 6 Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur er s instructions 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Multiple Child Restraint Crew Cab 1 Inner Anchor Strap Ring s 2 Snap Hook 3 Tether Strap 4 Passenger s Side Rear Child Seat 5 Rear Center Child Seat 6 Driver s Side Rear Child Seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Ch
273. nce will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch changes CDs on the 6 Disc in dash CD changer radio This button does not function for all other radios CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from you
274. nd pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror This procedure may be repeated with a new user The er will adapt i the ne trained voice only Baa Wales oe Mey Drones pease e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from e press the amp button you Reset e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Make sure that no one other than you is speaking Setup then Reset during a Voice Command period This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries Performance is maximized under and other settings in all language modes The System will e low to medium blower setting prompt you before resetting to factory settings e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e fully closed windows e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must a LEL h z JJ Mss h h e dry weather condition be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e Even though the system is designed for users speaking e You can say O letter O for 0 zero in North American English French and Spanish ac e Even though international dialing for most number
275. nd can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
276. nd to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor mance make sure the engine cooling system is function ing properly and the proper amount type and concen tration of coolant is used Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in fresh air with the blower setting in high This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging and Frosting Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in mild rainy and or humid weather Windows may frost on the inside of the glass in very cold weather To clear the windows select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed Do not use the Recirculation mode without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directl
277. nduction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep e It is essential when replacing the cables on the flam
278. ng and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual t d Q ED 69 WATER IN FUEL m WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS WIP INTERMITTENT FAILURE m m PEDS hy ome Q7 i FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER zc LOW BEAM KEY ACTIVATE INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWIT POWER OUTLET 9 NS lt d D Q s FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW DRM WASHER DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE WASHER FLUID LEVEL A 0 0 71 ZUN WINDSHIELD LIFTGATE RELEASE ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG LAMP AND LIFTGATE DEFROST HEATED OPEN BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION exes I t i CO 9 Cu GLOW PLUG
279. ng positions Panel Mode gt gt Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off the airflow from these outlets Bi Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window ad demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use Defrost mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activ
280. ngage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031305529 Safety Latch 1500 Series Shown 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog The headlight switch is located on the left side of the light if equipped lenses that are lighter and less suscep instrument panel next to the steering wheel The head tible to stone breakage than glass lights Plastic is not as light switch controls the operation of the headlights scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens parking lights instrument panel lights cargo lights and cleaning procedures must be followed iu M e To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and NER reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing CAUTION N Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses 031405770 Headlight Switch Location ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Headlights To turn on the headlights rotate the headlight AD switch clockwise When the headlight switch is on the parking lights taillights license plate li
281. nning To display the engine hours on the base cluster perform the following Place the ignition in the ON RUN but do not start the engine With the odometer value displayed hold the TRIP button down for a period of six seconds The odometer will change to trip value first then it will display the engine hour value The engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started Some of the above warnings will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Area located in the instrument cluster Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information If the vehicle diagnostic system determines e that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a loose gascap indi Loose Cator will display in the odometer display Gascap area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and Indicator press 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee the TRIP button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses an
282. nning for the heated seats to operate The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from LOW to OFF automatically based on time and tempera ture of the seat The heated seats can operate on HIGH heat for as little as 4 minutes and up to 30 minutes before switching to LOW heat Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat setting it may operate for an additional 60 minutes before automatically shutting OFF The heated seats can shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is already warm Ventilated Seats If Equipped On some models both the driver and passenger seats are ventilated Located in the seat cushion and seatback are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch bank in the center stack of the instrument panel just below the climate controls The fans operate at two speeds HIGH and LOW E 030905581 Press the switch once to choose HIGH press it a second time to choose LOW Pressing the switch a third time will turn the ventilated seat OFF When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the switch will be illuminated When LOW speed is selected one light will be illuminated NOTE The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Vehic
283. nning or off This shift cannot be com pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 NOTE The four wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD 4WD LOCK if the front and or rear wheels are spinning no traction In this situation the selected position indicator light will flash and the origi nal position indicator light will remain ON At this time reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift 2WD or 4WD LOCK 4WD LOW NOTE When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h or completely stopped You can use either of the following procedures Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine running slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing shift the transmission back into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine either OFF or running shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is ON not flashing
284. normal bulb check 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPARS parts for maint
285. not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh coolant Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system p
286. ns displays in the EVIC e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time Press the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the ODOMETER TRIP ODOMETER button once to clear the resettable function being displayed Vehicle Info Customer Information Features Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Vehicle Info displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the available information displays then press SELECT to display anyone of the following choices e Coolant Temp Displays the actual coolant temperature e Oil Temperature Displays the actual oil temperature e Oil Pressure Displays the actual oil pressure e Trans lemperature Displays the actual transmission temperature e Engine Hours Displays the hours of engine operation e Trailer Brake If Equipp
287. ns on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and that the front and rear drive shafts are locked together This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the transfer case NOTE Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit NOTE Delayed shifts out of four wheel drive may be experienced
288. nstructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305232 Media Center 130 RES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either but
289. ntil FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and fol
290. nuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the e button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The pai
291. o mode is active 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vr button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 e Previous Station to select the pre
292. o operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED e Ignition key removed from ignition switch This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still e RKE PANIC button not pressed maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto WARNING matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Battery at an acceptable charge level e Fuel meets minimum requirement e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or How To Use Remote Start confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon All of the following conditions must be met before the oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car engine will remote start bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious e Shift lever in PARK injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters e Doors closed away from children Operation of the Remote Start e Hood closed System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e HAZARD switch off e BR
293. of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 The parking brake should always be applied whenever WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving transmission in PARK a manual transmission in unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause number of reasons A child or others could be the vehicle to roll and cause damage Or injury the driver is not in the vehicle seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A CAUTION child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged parking brake released a brake system malfunction before driving failure to do so can lead to brake is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an failure and an accident authorized dealer immediately Cont
294. oises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails t
295. ol A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever CANCEL toward you will deacti vate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pushing the ON OFF button to the OFF position or turning OFF the ignition erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed raise the Electronic Speed Control lever RESUME ACCEL upwards and release Resume can be used at any speed above 30 mph 50 km h 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Varying The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping the RESUME ACCEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the lever results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the lev
296. on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the ve
297. on will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod CAUTION e Leaving the iPod or any supported device any where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or connections to the iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNINCG Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RES RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Ala
298. onic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired cellular 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the amp vR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority p
299. ons regulations and provide satisfac CAUTION tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav 4500 5500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direction of rotation This is to accommodate the ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu i i facturer recommends the use of 89 octane asymmetrical design tread pattern of the On Off road tire for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING R M 2 METHOD e When replacing a flat the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to tire on the wheel relative to the tire wheel position your engine However continued heavy spark knock at on the vehicle For example if the spare is used to high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re required mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished inward That way the tread design of asymmetrical tires will maintain proper position Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of regular gasoline be fore considering service for the vehicle 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Over 40
300. ont and rear driveshafts from the powertrain To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating for further information Shifting Procedure NOTE e f any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected posi tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift return the control knob back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again e f all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met the current position indicator light will turn OFF the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift When the shift is complete the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON 2WD 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn ing the control switch If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either ru
301. operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 To Activate Push the ON OFF button located in the end of the lever once and the cruise indicator light located in the mes sage window of the cluster will illuminate showing that the Electronic Speed Control system is on To turn the Electronic Speed Control system off push the ON OFF button a second time and both the Electronic Speed Control system and indicator will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidently set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET lever downward and then release Lift your foot off the accel erator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed Deactivating Electronic Speed Contr
302. ore information on Remote Start Comfort System operation refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features System Setup in Understanding Your Instru ment Panel ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 DOOR LOCKS WARNING Manual Door Locks Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving without lifting the lock knob unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on dows other controls or move the vehicle your vehicle Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors 021805728 Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not oper
303. orks by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking performance and could result in an accident e Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec reational Vehicle dealer for additional information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Fifth Wheel Hitch The fifth wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed It connects a vehicle and fifth wheel trailer with a coupling king pin Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm whic
304. osition e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the ci
305. ot the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ee allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in CAUTION Continued Federal and California reformulated gasoline e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition Materials Added To Fuel malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to All gasolines sold in the United States are required to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or contain effective detergent additives Use of additional some light smoke your engine may be out of tune detergents or other additives is not needed under normal or malfunctioning and may require immediate conditions and would result in unnecessary cost There service Contact your authorized dealer for service fore you should not have to add anything to the fuel 3sciebaie Fuel System Cautions e When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the CAUTION temperature is high use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock If spark knock per Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance sists lighten the load or engine piston damage may result e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance damage the emission control system Continued Continued e
306. ot use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The totally integrated power module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart 0729
307. otal distance the vehicle has been driven Regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button To reset a trip odometer display the desired trip odom eter to be reset then push and hold the button for approximately two seconds until the display resets Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer DOEUSE 2v or ure iR P ESI PE PE PY d xs Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoWASH Low Washer Fluid NOTE There is also an engine hour function This indicates the total number of hours the engine has been ru
308. ou are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System Remote Open Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency n
309. ound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 16 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE In vehicles with a 4 7L or 5 7L engine the highest available transmission gear is displayed in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC whenever the Electronic Range Select ERS feature is active Use the selector on the shift lever to activate ERS Refer to Automatic Transmission in Starting And Operating for further information 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 17 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches appro
310. owing the dolly manufacturer s instructions 2 Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly set the parking brake Place automatic transmis sion in PARK manual transmission in gear not in Neutral 4 Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Remove the key fob from the ignition switch 6 Install a suitable clamping device designed for tow ing to secure the front wheels in the straight position CAUTION e Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transmission causing damage to internal parts Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models NOTE Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL for recreational towing Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing Manual transmissions must be placed in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recre ational towing Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL shifting procedure for your vehicle e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Tow only in the forward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can c
311. oxdassiierrts m s tes 179 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 56 Event Data Recorder n 59 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 75 2321 EXIIHSE SYSTEM Panta oso Eure cere eee a5 73 390 Exterior Lighting cciedceR nda i eee poe ees 141 PEGO LISDIS iude duane Pa ESTATE SA rx 76 Filters Air Cleaner eee 384 ENGNG Del jteceueeos eet teegey ME PE E 423 Engel Suse xac parted c he ee ES 384 423 Poeme OILDISDOSdl arrire rure ere EIER 384 Flashers TERCIO BEI EPOE ose MS PR a 76 145 179 Flat lire Stowage a2 4 ere Fui PT S EX V 366 Flooded Engine Starting 2255 3a eR somes 264 Fluid Brake 45 445445 545 454040564005 56455 424 Puid Capacities cse sger rekis OS ERS ES GSES 422 Fluid Leaks 4 4444 6586u5t8055464625055 584 76 A INDEX 459 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission aa 403 DOLG acere 4339339 583 52409554 40 2 2 934 398 l OWEBI SICCIING 63 20 46 x xv 5 3 9 reece ie Cape io 289 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 423 Foe LS ETELE e pere d RED 142 190 418 Four Wheel Drive 4 sues as e44 99945 6 Seg 274 Four Way Hazard Flasher 22 2 emn 356 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle cqveeusavs Henge dees 370 Front Axle Differential 400 Iueb 2x39 eos oa 6 Rae rax DERE SPESE Ta 317 A ENEE 322 Wiesel T 423 Filler Cap Gas Cap 2 234 94 94 9e do iteras 323 PIHET 4Aonboe eee riea rA eee heee sea ee aa 423 ioo rrrrrm 179 Era CP CCU
312. p playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command amp vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 1 Press the Voice Command AVR button say System WARNING Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area and will improve recognition inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by seriously injured or killed Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the
313. passenger side convex mirror could cause you to a WA collide with another vehicle or other object Use your C inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a 030405626 vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex right side mirror Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Folding Mirror All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either CAUTION forward or rearward to resist damage ui It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Mirrors If Equipped The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver s door trim panel 030405743 Power Mirror Controls 1 Mirror Select Buttons 2 Mirror Control Power Mirror Controls To adjust a mirror press the mirror select button for the The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but mirror that you want to adjust Using the mirror control tons and a four way mirror control switch switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Illuminated Vanity Mirror If Equipped Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on auto matically Clos
314. ped for further information ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster NE 83 F FM 103 5 Fuel Economy p ACC 200 km h rip Info 56789 mi 041008786 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NOTE The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e Vehicle Info display e Vehicle information warning message displays e Customer Programmable Features System Setup e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Distance To Empty DTE display e Average Fuel Economy e Audio Modes display 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Steering wheel EVIC control button as it appears on the left side of the steer ing wheel Press and release the UP button to scroll up TX ward through the main menus DTE mi gal System Info Messages Units Setup and sub menus Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the main menus and sub menus Steering wheel EVIC control button as it appears on the right side of the steering wheel
315. pening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Program mable Features System Setup in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least four seconds but no longer than ten seconds Then press the PANIC button while still hold ing the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while y
316. ping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued 294 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings NL s AD by S i Bg am 3 11 b Feyyyroasse Y X eae yo 1 U S DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning wi
317. posite to the nut just previ ously tightened until final torque is achieved Recom mended torques are shown in the following chart 366 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Disc Wheels Type Nut Torque Ft Lbs Torque Newton Meters Cone j9 1618 120 150 160 200 Flanged 9 16 18 130 160 190 220 To Stow The Flat Or Spare If Equipped JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES Refer to Upfitters Body Builders Guide for information If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump on stowing your spare tire if equipped started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster HOISTING pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking so please follow the procedures in this section carefully locations Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca tions However a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts or the underbody CAUTION Never use a floor jack directly under the differential NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 367 CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may
318. pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player wil
319. r Weight Ratings NOTE For additional trailer towing information maxi mum trailer weight ratings refer to the following website addresses e http www dodge com bodybuilder e http www dodge ca Canada Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 057003767 a STARTING AND OPERATING 331 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading In formation Placard in Starting and Operating for fur ther information Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow
320. r axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue 328 STARTING AND OPERATING ee that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system w
321. r counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushb
322. r radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio NOTE During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with outside temperature display the display may show higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera ture The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera ture sensor caused by the snowplow In addition on vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control ATC it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature be manually controlled should the system not perform as desired while in automatic mode Both the outside tem perature display and ATC operation will return to nor mal when the snowplow is removed 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System Front Blower Control The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning There are four blower speeds Use this system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary control to regulate the a
323. racks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor
324. rcumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING In an accident an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an in
325. rect gear and a special underdrive gear refer to Electronic Range Se lect in this section are performed for improved brak ing when driving conditions warrant The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the button must be pressed each time the engine is started Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in 2 4 STARTING AND OPERATING ee the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during the transmission This condition is normal and will not acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second cause damage to the transmission The torque con gear the clutch automatically disengages verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from NOTE PARK into any other gear position e The torque converter clutch will not engage until the FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION transmission fluid and engine coolant antifreeze are IF EQUIPPED warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 to 4 8 km of Four wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a driving Because the engine speed is higher when the i man
326. red phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the Se button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your cellular phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin
327. remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Electronic Speed Control Light This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON e Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the KA Electronic Throttle Control ETC system The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing e Engine Temperature Warning Light E Th
328. ressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to Maintenance Schedule for proper maintenance intervals Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as the
329. ring column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the multifunction lever Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place Tilt Steering Lever 031605589 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows the brake accelerator and clutch pedals if equipped to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of 2 Fasten and adjust the seatbelts He oe Eon 3 Move the adjustable pedal switch in the direction you desire the pedals to move NOTE The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when t
330. rning Flasher 2 2 ituri ved 356 Heddle DS ses dea 8 a ous ra dos P eos RF ded 141 FC DCA i oar gee Se te oa POP E n d 146 186 High Beam Indicator ss 21444524 444 ca0 hes 186 High Beam Low Beam Select 146 Iltininated ENUY 22 44 3 ritui Eeyan 19 Instrument Cluster 124 sm redo dew ad 179 IIO 202 2443 234 3 259 693 5 93 ee 143 155 Lights On Reminder oi ea qoe Ge ede ed 144 OW Dueb 42999 R3 0 oso ee ee 186 QIEE o TC 188 PassiIN die2Res4hek3 ke e dg eee sa E 146 Seat Belt Reminder Ln 191 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 182 DODVIOG recrear e dox dus SUP E obs oU ES 415 416 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 182 Transfer Case uuoasoacex a 3 345 40068 eU 278 TUE OIC a both da tenses aoe aoe 76 145 416 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 179 Limited 5lip Differential a6 css hue vue a Hus 284 401 Loading VehICle 2 16 68 drea cans ae d dor di cones 324 jc MTPPM P rr 300 LOO S 22x PE SOME RUeMPREGUIORRPASEEASE TES 29 Child Protection 22 assensu vo em Rm eic Cae 32 DOO Pr c 29 Power Door 6420444 5504056566 do P dog dn 30 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LAICH i492 230m pU Su DE Pea be kee SS 64 L brication Body 644 56 ooh ot ou ex eens ae 388 Ide NOU sperrer ee oth eh Ee e ag d 361 363 Nee INDEX 463 Maintenance Free Dattery 44434040 prises 385 Maintenance Procedures 0 0004 381 Maintenance Schedule
331. rofessionals The Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS is de signed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation This is normal The ABS conducts a low speed selftest at about 10 mph 16 km h If you have your foot lightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal When you are in a severe braking condition involving use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system and is normal Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning ABS Warning Light The ABS includes an amber warning light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stop
332. rolling The iPod Using Radio Buttons 237 DT MOSS 2i 3 9cq 4T ESe rb Sa Y os 237 HTast Or Browse Mode 4 250044 e220 trati 238 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 ll Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio HELD Player 4 no 44545 tS h eno HP RS CS eee 246 it Equipped REN RER RES Radios Only 220 E CD DVD Disc Maintenance ss 246 el NON aS tae ae ea ns ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 247 ose mrt c yay M Climate Controls isses 247 O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite ar eae ee COMMON Mode i e eee 241 ll ee ee ae donas C Satellite Antenna o Lise ee O Reception Quality e 2 c3 ee8egupe elses 242 HSummer Deraliom cre ec1osa lt aeaceces 256 ones TM E a a ri DEM HE Uo o sasar is soru seceg ae 257 4 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone AVAAN on DONIO E 2 2 d acp ig Hoag ob a as 257 ie P UID PEG MMC MOM 244 H Window Fogging And Frosting 257 ll Steering Wheel Audio Controls If Equipped 245 O Outside Air Intake 2 444554 cnge4 ees 257 mRadio ODSESE OB a 4544 cone dei oe pee YO 245 Operate TDs saa 25 9 9p somos 99 deep oe 258 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Headlight Switch 2 Instrument Cluster 3 Radio 4 Upper Switch Bank 5 Upper Glove Compartment 6 Lower Glove Compartment ci 13 Transfer Case Position Switch 14 Ignition Switch 15 Hood Release 16 Parking
333. rrae Eon dco das 145 179 416 UCI Connector 24644554848 0 4 48 604044545 235 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 88 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 451 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 235 Variance Compass c a au e c wr i ewe vd eae os 204 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 veMele Loading PP 301 324 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Velucle SIOMIGe cece bp eis bathe eae eases 257 415 Voice Recognition System VR 118 Voltmeter gana ch eseene eee Po eas Reeds as 186 OA LULLLILCLILUUUIIIL ULICLOLALGGCG GUAATAGULIHIA G G tLLLELLIL uvUEIJIQun n LLLLULUtAUUU AA L LUAUIUU4 LLL OG Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 179 Warnings and Cautions soosis 445 0 4 9 5 Aq fed oed 6 Warranty Information sss ae ence erp t ert t 448 Washers Windshield 147 389 Washing VeluclB sssri trara titig teen oe eae 405 Water Driving TDEOUB as acceso mE enue Geena 285 Wheel and Wheel Trim 2 407 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 407 Aneel Cover MCCC oe eee oe ees 362 Wheel Nut Torque 41252222939 Re 9 es 361 365 Wind Buen iciousund uua put vocem cn ds e oe 37 WINGO BOBO ypres turers ESTE 257 ANONS MEC T 34 loe stack CPU 24 Rear UGS presegata eh 172 Windshield Defroster icu a suena eee eed aL acis ac oes 74 Windshield Washers 146 147 389 Iz M e ee eo ees 6 bbe ea
334. rrors eee 85 171 Heated Seats 24226689550 eeeee da RIEF S 130 lacus ae ae a ea anaE ERRER 248 Heater Engine BIOCK 42944 40004 694 SUR 265 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 146 Hitches Trailer TOWNS 632 2 adc 9 9 99 9 Riu ES ho rd 929 laf PPP rm 366 Hood Release uia 2443379 4 X405 9 39 243 0X4 ea 138 HOI ao Pr 362 ISOM Sasa Sosageen aan aster dos RR IR UA 14 Key ETETETT TTTS es eae Eo ae 12 14 Ienition Key Removal ux voces eeswaceear day Pe 14 Ged PTE Yaa e tee ia Ho eas Oe Oe 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key 5212 SE xU 16 Infant Restraint eee 60 61 Inflation Pressure Tires een 313 Information Center Vehicle 192 Inside Rearview Mirror lesen 81 Instrument Cluster 2 2056055426444 RR 177 179 D EEEERLLSIIIIIIIIGIIIIIIILIULLILLLILLLISIUULII ILILE LLSOLLA OUL LOSGLoLLOLLAUIU4 LL LL LOALUUL UIGuLLIu l eSuuaeLLGAeAALLL ULIGILAIHA 4LGLoU G UudNU uDUuLL LAAL setPR IEpnL LL OGLeAU A UUUUC AAA I 2 2 OP 31 Instrument Panel and Controls 176 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 409 Integrated Power Module Fuses 410 Integrated Trailer Brake Controls 334 Interior Appearance Care s sabes dcs 408 Menor LEIO Mq cM 143 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 147 TH EOO ECLIOD 6 44 4n0 4 6oe 14 GER Ge Gee GS d Inverter Outlet 115V a uuo vae vee este d ves 160 Jack Dea HODE s ease v
335. s 199 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 199 000 km Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s a a M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 439 128 000 Miles 212 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 136 000 Miles 225 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil 128 000 miles 212 000 km filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Replace the spark plugs irregular wear even if it occurs before Lube the front drive shaft fitting 4x4 only 136 000 miles 225 000 km Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes T Lube the front drive shaft fitting Change the transfer case fluid
336. s list phones towing assistance a mute off new entr transfer call n Uconnect Tutorial try again pager mobile A set up phone settings or phone ohone pairing pairing work ohonebook ohone book yes previous record again MEE redial 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Wh
337. s improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD LOCK Four Wheel Drive Lock Range This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces only 4WD LOW Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range provides low speed four wheel drive It locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ee N Neutral This range disengages both the fr
338. s recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the AVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All
339. s seat positioning which will enhance driver mobility into and out of the vehicle The seat cushion will move rearward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is removed from the ignition switch The seat will move forward approximately 2 5 in 60 mm when the key is placed into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Exit and Easy Entry position The Easy Exit and Easy Entry feature may be automatically disabled if the seat is positioned rearward enough and there is no benefit in moving the seat any farther rearward NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be en abled or disabled through the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood two latches must be released 1 Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel 031305528 Hood Release ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 2 Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release a it before raising the hood To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches e
340. se affect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 406 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Special Care Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e f you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept c
341. se levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury
342. sed with water as directed on the container aids cleaning action reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging and is not harmful to paint or trim Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your v
343. self on the c clip The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution 266 STARTING AND OPERATING M AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL DH into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before
344. shift the transmission back into gear 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ee NOTE e If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON until all requirements have been met e The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The limited slip differential provides additional traction on snow ice mud sand and gravel particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels During normal driving and cornering the limited slip unit per forms similarly to a conventional differential On slippery surfaces however the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction The limited slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain m
345. sing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of the Crew Cab models The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC position and for up to 10 min utes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened NOTE The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the d power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the Power Windows If Equipped ignition is turned OFF This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened Power Window Switches 1 Left Front 3 Right Rear 2 Right Front 4 Left Rear eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down movement op erate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the fir
346. single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the
347. ska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will displa
348. ss For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say C
349. ssed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Messages e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the AVR button while the 10 system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to 12 List of Preset Messages 13 1 Yes 14 2 No T5 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Where are you I need more direction LOT Why I love you Call me Call me later Thanks See You in 15 minutes I am on my way I ll be late Are you there yet Where are we meeting 111 112 UND
350. ssing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met during the shift the NEUTRAL indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position for a transfer case shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON RUN position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Mi Hazard Warning Flasher 356 W Jump Starting Procedures 366 W Jacking And Tire Changing 356 O Preparations For Jump Start 367 0 3500 Models If Equipped 357 O T p St r ng Procedure lt s seses are ms O Preparations For Jacking 358 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle os is esa 4ue mamas El Jacking Instructions 446 lt s 2s0ehe84n8e 358 W Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped slo i PPP 366 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 372 O Four Wheel Drive Vehicles 972 D Two Wheel Drive Vehicles 373 356 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the WARNING upper switch bank just below the radio Press the switch to turn on
351. st detent and release it when you want the window to stop Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection 4 Door Models Driver s and Front Passenger Door Only If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop NOTE e f the window runs into any obstacle during the auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window Any impact due to 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually e If the Auto Up function is lost reset the Auto Up function by running the window all the way up by holding the switch in the first up detent and then hold the switch in the full up position for two seconds WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window LOCKOUT Switch 4 Door Models Only The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the o
352. t have the negative effects of Methanol ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or n
353. t use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the wheel skins Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion loosen the wheel skin Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet When replacing the hub caps tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel Dual Rear Wheels Dual wheels are flat mounted center piloted The lug nuts are a two piece assembly When the tires are being rotated or replaced clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer 060505399 Oiling Location 364 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels Align these slots when assem bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner wheel The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to insure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping Dual wheel models require a special heavy duty lug nut tightening adapter included with the vehicle to cor rectly tighten the lug nuts Also when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels use a proper vehicle lifting device NOTE When installing a spare tire if equipped as part of a dual rear wheel end combination the tire
354. ted Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the vr button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the Xe button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hol
355. tellite Radio 232 241 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 393 CPIS aeree aaen geari ad 422 DISPOSAL uox uomo 8eden ed tHEbs he POR RR 396 Anti Lock Warning Light 42s yu 190 293 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 Mie MeO tutes ed paek ose tt om Ep f d 18 Appearance Car s us x x5 bres dr CR eR RU BOR 405 Doc MUT T ae Re Gee eS he 160 Posistance IOWING 234334 heee ete tne tiiti 102 Auto Down Power Windows 35 Automatic Dimming Mirror sens sk nod Rr 82 Automate lleadhebis iudex k9 rem rer eR 44 141 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 292 en INDEX 455 Automatic Transmission Adding Fuld MR 403 Fildid and Filter Changes 2s 402 danas 0 des 404 Fluid Level Check sss 402 403 Hd TDG eid eed esi onan ao ce d oe 402 424 SMMC Pr B 268 Dpeond A OCDE so g ucs dace dd eee ke oe LE 404 Axle Fluid enn 400 401 424 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 400 401 Datel 8 iste Sy es ecetes d eu bee ta E mi 385 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 24 Saving Feature Protection 144 belts Seat 4345 45 0 640 4 555 058 0547 584 ifi 38 73 Body Builders Guide s seii deu douces xcd ogeh Ree 6 Body Mechanism Lubrication 388 b Pill t Location ue 5234046082 6403 55605 300 brake Fluid 24 5 4 45 543 4044 6 eee ease ed 398 424 Peake O 268405565 AT STI ERST PODER EA 292 398 Aut ocl ABS 4
356. tems and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 446 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include t
357. ter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information Fluid Level Check If equipped with a dipstick use the following procedure If your vehicle has a capped dipstick tube it is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly The fluid level should be checked when the engine is fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmis sion is at normal operating temperature Operation of the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 transmission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced Fluid Level Check 545RFE Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 82 C 180 F This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the lever in PARK Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6
358. th the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e T Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 2906 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 EXAMPLE 95 Load Ind
359. the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the amp VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 3746 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the EvR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt
360. the driver and The center storage compartment is located between the passenger door trim panels driver and passenger seats The storage compartment provides an armrest and contains both and upper and lower storage area 035205819 Rear Door Storage 035305806 F bo AR Center Storage Compartment ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 WARNING e This armrest is not a seat Anyone seated on the armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation or an accident Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright In an accident the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs 4 5 kg These items could be thrown about en dangering occupants of the vehicle Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 Ibs 4 5 kg Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise the cover The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt power outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices refer to Electrical Power Outlets for further information 035305807 Upper Storage Compartment 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M With the upper lid closed pull on the lower handle to Seatback Storage open the lower storage bin Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front seats are pockets that can be used for storage 035305808 Drivers Side Seatback Storage 035205816 Storage Regu
361. the seatback and release the handle at the desired position To return the seatback lift upward on the handle lean forward and release the handle at the desired position Manual Seat Adjuster UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 WARNING e Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seat back to swing dump forward on manual recliner seats Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating the handle The seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury This dump feature allows access to the storage bin behind the seat To avoid injury place your hand on the seatback and actuate the handle then posi tion the seatback in the desired position 030905747 Recline Handle Continued 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad WARNING Continued e You can be seriously even fatally injured riding in a seat with the seatback reclined Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest If you ride in this position the shoulder harness will no longer be restraining you In an accident you could slide under the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduc
362. the vehicle s battery The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right brighter or left dimmer When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer trip odom eter radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click This feature is termed the Parade mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day 031405772 Dimmer Control 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Cargo Light The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo button 031405776 Cargo Light Switch The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately 30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed as part of the Illuminated Entry feature Lights on Reminder If the headlights parking lights or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle s battery load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for 10 minutes the interior lights will automatically turn off If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled OFF the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minut
363. ther doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCK button into the latched or down position To enable the window controls press the win dow LOCK button again and return the switch to the released or up position 021905732 Window Lockout Switch 1 Window Lockout Switch ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or in partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e All seat belt systems except driver s first and second row center position include Automatic Locking Re tractors ALR If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint syst
364. tion of a Crew Cab model rear seat The LATCH anchorages in this seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi tions only A child may be placed in the rear center seating position of a Crew Cab model using the seat belt and child tether anchorage Failure to follow this may result in serious or fatal injury 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether anchorages Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system child restraint The child could be badly injured or kille
365. tions at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the Ss button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing proce
366. tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 452 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ui wasnt warning The temperature grades are A the highest B and C dos iq se representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and red
367. to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 28 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M belt remains unbuckled the seat belt reminder light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 29 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equip
368. to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h e Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the transmission is in gear Transfer Case Position Indicator Light The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Four Position Switch If Equipped This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch Transfer Case Switch which is located on the instrument panel 4WD LOW 4WD LOCK PAID T PUE NEUTRAL 051905705 Transfer Case Switch Four Position This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions e Two wheel drive high range 2WD e Four wheel drive lock range AWD LOCK e Four wheel drive low range AWD LOW ee STARTING AND OPERATING 279 e Neutral NEUTRAL This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two wheel drive position 2WD for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position Refer to Shifting Procedure
369. to lock the doors After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set After the alarm is set the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 NOTE If the Vehicle Security Light stays on continu ously during vehicle operation have the system checked by an authorized dealer To Disarm the System Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door If something has triggered the system in your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors and the Vehicle Security Light will flash for 30 seconds Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if the vehicle is started with a programmed Sentry Key If an unpro grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle the engine will run for two seconds and then the alarm will be initiated To exit the alarming mode press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button or start the vehicle with a programmed Sentry Key The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If one of the previ ously described arming sequences has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicl
370. tomer Center 446 O In Mexico Contact 24 26 4 a x dta ach eed ved s 446 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 447 A Seve CONTACT 4 eeudna 6 unde RR ees ees 447 Bl Warranty Information 448 E MOPAR Parts o4 ccc0heduuws ed sabe ea de 448 W Reporting Safety Defects 448 O In The 50 United States And Washington D C 0 In Canada 444 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE See W Publication Order Forms 449 O Trachon Grades uad b5rcembesce 49 RA 451 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire D Temp rature Grades 5 sans oa oh Ue eo ee oS 452 Quality Grades ess She ose eed oe oe E OE 451 DE Tread weal 22 432993 dex acre 44008 451 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 445 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of i
371. ton will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn th
372. tor is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Continued 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing chil
373. tter To disable another RKE transmitter linked to either memory position repeat Steps 1 3 for each RKE trans mitter NOTE The capability to link RKE transmitters to memory is enabled when delivered from the factory The capability to link RKE transmitters to memory can be disabled or later re enabled by an authorized dealer For vehicles equipped with the Electronic vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Self Limiting Control The memory system includes a self limiting control for full travel positioning of power seat and adjustable pedal movement all directions This self limiting control may however develop an unintended movement limitation if an obstruction is encountered sometime during usage One example of such an occurrence may include a box or package obstructing the full rearward movement of the driver s seat Once the obstruction is removed the self limiting control may store a new maximum position the self limiting control may be reset by reaching the new stored position then press and release MEMORY button 1 or 2 Continued seat travel beyond the new stored position will indicate the self limiting control has been reset 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Driver Easy Exit and Easy Entry Control This additional feature provides automatic driver
374. turer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 448 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemic
375. ually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as transfer case Refer to the operating instructions for your if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when transfer case located in this section for further informa cold This is normal Pressing the TOW HAUL ton switch when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into Manually Shifted Transfer Case If Equipped and out of Overdrive The transfer case provides four mode positions e If the vehicle has not been driven in several days the Two wheel drive high range 2H first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans e Four wheel drive high range 4H mission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into Neutral N ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 e Four wheel drive low range 4L This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads When additional traction is required the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only Driving in the 4H and 4L positio
376. uce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX Be V gcssccccc qRqR Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 394 POG DUE s enpsereene sng eas oes 322 Adjustable Pedals esa sao x kane ee ee ia 149 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 384 Air Conditioner Maintenance 387 DUC ODD Bog 2 uat R acsi SORS ni 3 aes P 248 Air Conditioning Controls 2tc8te nate tes s purs 248 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 258 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 387 388 Aur Conditioning System ua scende s 248 252 387 Air Pressure Tires llle 305 313 ANDA 43 yeahs renra NAT RR E ESOS 49 Aubae Deployment s o eu mezza Sce p x is 56 Arba Ligii 20 phe ded eee OR SL 55 59 74 190 Aitoag NMamtenance sses iieri ap au ages x 58 ADO Ide 322 ex aud PIRA RA Rb A EE 54 Airbag Window Side Curtain 54 Alam LOI scene tdeat eee ee oes gereten 182 Alam Pale 6 5 4 4 4 5 oh en BS oe ae 544 1 33 3 5 3 24 Alarm Secum 26560524 heuer ak 18 Alarm System Security Alarm 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Sa
377. uel Approximate S o o Engine Oil with Filter EE NENNEN 5 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified Cooling System o ooo o 5 7L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 18 7 Quarts 17 7 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 5 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter 5 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 5 7L Engine LZFR5C 11 Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 5 7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 89 Octane Recommended 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Automatic Transmission Five Speed 545RFE Transfer Case Front and Rear Axle Fluid 4500 5500 Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product GL 5 SAE 75W 90 Synthetic MS 9763 or equivalent MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not availab
378. uminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel if equipped When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of t
379. uring very sudden stops or accidents This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and e Two people should never be belted into a single using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of an accident best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your p
380. uring Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front airbags in a frontal collision is required Based on impact sensor signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type an
381. utomatic Transmission Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range NOTE This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disen gage when the engine is running 260 STARTING AND OPERATING M If the engine fails to start after you have followed the VARNING Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to there while cranking the engine This should clear any start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire excess fuel in case the engine is flooded causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the vehicle has a discharge
382. utton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI 0 5 IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ ru REL RET radios only with Uconnect For sales code RER RBZ REN RED REW RB2 or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN RBZ RB2 or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios This feature allows an iPod to be plugged into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e Ifthe radio has a USB port
383. vehicle 6 Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 8 Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing 7 Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel remove the fastener and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this MEE m access hole 9 Remove the headlamp assembly Grasp the outboard edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet 073306875 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE eee 10 Disconnect electrical connectors Fog Lamps If Equipped 11 Replace bulb s as necessary 1 Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the back of the front fog lamp housing CAUTION 2 Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector e Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it from the fog lamp bulb with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces Shortened bulb life will result 3 Rotate the bulb counterclockwise 1 4 turn to unlock the bulb from the housing Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement An incorrect bulb size or type may 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the housing overheat and cause damage to the lamp the bul
384. vious station Disc To switch to the di de say Disc In thi de e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu m ce e desertis dee may say the following commands e Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Track to change the track Satellite Radio z P To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite M D a Bia ne net wach 3 Radio In this mode you may say the following com e Previous Track to play the previous track mands e Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number Vemo P To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In e Next Channel to select the next channel this mode you may say the following commands e Previous Channel to select the previous channel e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the Voice Command eVR button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of e Select Name to say the name of a channel the following commands e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Save to save the memo e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the Voice Command VR button to sto
385. ward the rear seat passengers Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air Conditioning Operation 045632844 Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A LED will illu minate when the A C system is engaged 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MAX A C e When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode For maximum cooling when MAX operation Auto blower operation is set by using rotary A C is selected the A C is turned on knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature automatically and the air is recircu setting by using the temperature up and down but lated tons e The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience NOTE A C cannot be deselected when in MAX A C The system can be controlled manually if desired position The LED will blink three times if the A C button is pushed 045632845 e SYNC feature links the temperature controls the pas senger side temperature becomes the same as the Automatic Temperature Control ATC temperature selected by the driver If Equipped The ATC system automatically maintains the interior e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers both driver and front passenger seat occupants to select individual comfort settin
386. will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your op
387. ximately 3 0 gal 11 0 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for further information 18 High Beam Indicator E This indicator shows that headlights are on high beam Push the multifunction lever forward to switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 19 Voltmeter If Equipped When the engine is running the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving the electrical system should be serviced NOTE The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures This cycling operation is caused by the post heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module Post heat operation can run for several minutes and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize 20 Cargo Light The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pressing the cargo light S button on the headlight switch ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 21
388. y Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either
389. y may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 173 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is th
390. y in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow can cause odor and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS Hot weather and Es d 9 vehicle interior is very MOC contro to P on and blower on high Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out hot t C a the hot air Once comfort is achieved adjust controls for 44 Warm weather O Turn on and set the mode control to the P position gt o Cool Sunny Operate in xo position Cool amp Humid conditions e 66 4 Set the mode control to 4 P and turn on c o to keep windows clear e Set the mode control to the i position If windshield Cold Weather qe fogging starts to occur move the control towards the position 8000cb71 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS li Starting Procedures EL oia rare 2 42 245 458 4 pia Y E SORS B Automatic Transmission Olf Engine Fails To Start iuo er eee ees MAM SINS aka dem eh eee huh CICER ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped Bl Automatic Transmission O Key Ignition Park Interlock o Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 263 205 263 264 265 265 266 267
391. y use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 A STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard
392. yed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the ri
393. yer or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio side of the radio faceplate Media Center 130 RES RSC 042305233 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last pla

Dodge 2011 Ram Truck Chassis Cab User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents